Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisPresents all-new laboratory-tested theory for calculating more accurate ionized electric fields to aid in designing high-voltage devices and its components Understanding and accurately calculating corona originated electric fields are important issues for scientists who are involved in electromagnetic and electrostatic studies. High-voltage dc lines and equipment, in particular, can generate ion flows that can give rise to environmental inconveniences. Filamentary Ion Flow: Theory and Experiments provides interdisciplinary theoretical arguments to attain a final model for computational electrostatics in the presence of flowing space charge. Based on years of extensive lab tests pertaining to the physical performance of unipolar corona ion flows, the book covers the enlarging of conventional electrostatic applications, which allows for some emerging and uncharted interests to be explored. Filamentary Ion Flow: Examines theTrade Review“This made the book very interesting and well worth reading if you are involved in modeling electrostatic ion flows.” (IEEE Electrical Engineering magazine, 1 March 2015) Table of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xv INTRODUCTION xvii PRINCIPAL SYMBOLS xxv 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL DISCHARGES 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Ionization Processes in Gases 1 1.2.1 Ionization by Electron Impact 2 1.2.2 Townsend First Ionization Coefficient 3 1.2.3 Electron Avalanches 5 1.2.4 Photoionization 6 1.2.5 Other Ionization Processes 6 1.3 Deionization Processes in Gases 7 1.3.1 Deionization by Recombination 7 1.3.2 Deionization by Attachment 7 1.4 Ionization and Attachment Coefficients 9 1.5 Electrical Breakdown of Gases 10 1.5.1 Breakdown in Steady Uniform Field: Townsend's Breakdown Mechanism 11 1.5.2 Paschen's Law 12 1.6 Streamer Mechanism 13 1.7 Breakdown in Nonuniform DC Field 14 1.8 Other Streamer Criteria 16 1.9 Corona Discharge in Air 17 1.9.1 DC Corona Modes 17 1.9.2 Negative Corona Modes 18 1.9.3 Positive Corona Modes 20 1.10 AC Corona 22 1.11 Kaptzov's Hypothesis 23 2 ION-FLOW MODELS: A REVIEW 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 The Unipolar Space-Charge Flow Problem 26 2.2.1 General Formulation 26 2.2.2 Iterative Procedure 29 2.2.3 The Unipolar Charge-Drift Formula 29 2.3 Deutsch's Hypotheses (DH) 30 2.4 Some Unipolar Ion-Flow Field Problems 31 2.4.1 Analytical Methods 33 2.4.2 Numerical Methods 40 2.5 Special Models 51 2.5.1 Drift of Charged Spherical Clouds 51 2.5.2 Graphical Approach 53 2.6 More on DH and Concluding Remarks 58 3 INTRODUCTORY SURVEY ON FLUID DYNAMICS 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Continuum Motion of a Fluid 64 3.3 Fluid Particle 65 3.4 Field Quantities 66 3.5 Conservation Laws in Differential Form 67 3.5.1 Generalization 67 3.5.2 Mass Conservation 68 3.5.3 Momentum Conservation 69 3.5.4 Total Kinetic Energy Conservation 70 3.6 Stokesian and Newtonian Fluids 71 3.7 The Navier–Stokes Equation 72 3.8 Deterministic Formulation for et 73 3.9 Incompressible (Isochoric) Flow 73 3.9.1 Mass Conservation 73 3.9.2 Subsonic Flow 74 3.9.3 Momentum Conservation 74 3.9.4 Total Kinetic Energy Conservation 75 3.10 Incompressible and Irrotational Flows 75 3.11 Describing the Velocity Field 76 3.11.1 Decomposition 76 3.11.2 The v-Field of Incompressible and Irrotational Flows 76 3.11.3 Some Practical Remarks and Anticipations 77 3.12 Variational Interpretation in Short 78 3.12.1 Bernoulli's Equation for Incompressible and Irrotational Flows 78 3.12.2 Lagrange's Function 80 4 ELECTROHYDRODYNAMICS OF UNIPOLAR ION FLOWS 87 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Reduced Mass-Charge 88 4.3 Unified Governing Laws 90 4.3.1 Mass-Charge Conservation Law 90 4.3.2 Fluid Reaction to Excitation Electromagnetic Fields 92 4.3.3 Invalid Application of Gauss's Law: A Pertaining Example 93 4.3.4 Laplacian Field and Boundary Conditions 95 4.3.5 Vanishing Body Force of Electrical Nature 96 4.3.6 Unified Momentum and Energy Conservation Law 97 4.3.7 Mobility in the Context of a Coupled Model 98 4.3.8 Some Remarks on the Deutsch Hypothesis (DH) 100 4.4 Discontinuous Ion-Flow Parameters 103 4.4.1 Multichanneled Structure 103 4.4.2 Current Distribution 104 4.4.3 More on the Average Quantities 108 4.5 Departures from Previous Theories 109 4.5.1 Ion-Drift Formulation 110 4.5.2 Comparative Discussion 112 4.5.3 Ionic Wind in the Drift Zone 117 4.6 Concluding Remarks on the Laplacian Structure of Ion Flows 120 5 EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION ON UNIPOLAR ION FLOWS 131 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 V-Shaped Wire Above Plane 136 5.2.1 Main Observables 144 5.3 Two-Wire Bundle 146 5.3.1 Main Observables 154 5.4 Inclined Rod 156 5.4.1 Main Observables 159 5.5 Partially Covered Wire 162 5.5.1 Main Observables 167 5.6 Pointed-Pole Sphere 168 5.6.1 Main Observables 170 5.7 Straight Wedge 170 5.7.1 Main Observables 174 5.8 Discussion 175 5.8.1 Supplementary Theoretical Analysis 175 5.9 Generalization According to Invariance Principles 179 REFERENCES 185 INDEX 193

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides detailed descriptions of organic, inorganic, and hybrid solar cells and the latest developments in the quest to produce low-cost, long-lasting solar cells What will it take to transform solar energy from an important alternative source to a truly competitive and, perhaps, dominant one? Lower cost and longer life.Table of ContentsForeword Preface About the Authors Chapter 1 Introduction – Why Solar Energy? Ching-Fuh Lin 1.1 The Era of Fossil Energy 1.1.1 Possible Depletion of Fossil Fuels 1.1.2 Global Warming 1.1.3 Dramatic Change of Weather 1.2 Renewable Energies 1.3 Solar Energy and Economy 1.3.1 Production Issue 1.3.2 Types of Solar Cells 1.3.3 Cost Analysis—Grid Parity 1.3.4 Cost Analysis—Break Down the System Cost 1.3.5 The Forecast and Practical Trends 1.4 Move toward Thin-Film Solar Cells 1.4.1 Inorganic vs. Organic 1.4.2 More Possible Applications 1.5 Outline of the Book Chapter 2 Light and Its Interaction with Matters Ching-Fuh Lin 2.1 What is Light? 2.1.1 Light Ray 2.1.2 Light as a Wave 2.1.3 Plane-wave Solution of Wave Equation 2.1.4 Wave as a Particle 2.1.5 Black-body Radiation and Solar Spectrum 2.1.6 The Brightness and Intensity of Sunlight 2.2 Fundamentals of Interaction between Light and Matters 2.2.1 Interaction of Electric Field with Dielectrics 2.2.2 Interaction of Light with Magnetic Materials 2.2.3 Summary of Light-Matter Interaction without Energy Exchange 2.3 Basic Properties of Transparent Materials 2.3.1 Reflection and Refraction 2.3.1.1 Boundary Conditions for Electric and Magnetic Fields 2.3.1.2 Reflection and Transmission of Plane Waves 2.3.1.3 Laws of Reflection and Refraction 2.3.1.4 Reflection and Transmission Coefficients 2.3.1.5 Reflectivity and Ratio of Transmitted Intensity 2.3.1.6 Total Reflection 2.3.1.7 Brewster Angle 2.3.2 Polarization 2.3.3 Dispersion 2.3.4 Isotropy and Anisotropy 2.3.5 Scattering 2.3.6 Nonlinear Optics: Energy Up Conversion and Down Conversion 2.4 Interaction of Light and Matters with Energy Exchange 2.4.1 Interaction of Light with Conductors 2.4.2 Quantum Concept of Atomic System 2.4.3 Light-Matter Interactions Chapter 3 Fundamentals of Inorganic Solar Cells Chih-I Wu 3.1. From Atomic Bonds to Energy Bands 3.2 Energy Bands from a Quantum Mechanics Point of View 3.3. The Energy Band in Semiconductors 3.4. PN Junction 3.5 Energy Band Diagram of the PN Junction 3.6 Carrier Transport in a PN Junction 3.6.1 Diffusion 3.6.2 Drift 3.7 PN junction diodes 3.8 Solar Cell Diodes 3.9 Interaction of Light and Materials 3.10 Solar Cell Materials 3.10.1 Crystalline Silicon 3.10.2 GaAs 3.10.3 Thin Film Silicon 3.10.4 Cu-In-Ga-Se (CIGS) 3.10.5 Polymer Solar Cell Materials Chapter 4 Organic Materials Wei-Fang Su 4.1 Bonding and Structure of Organic Molecule 4.2 Properties of Organic Molecules 4.3 Optical Properties of Organic Materials 4.3.1 Absorption 4.3.2 Fluorescence 4.4 Band Gap of Organic Materials 4.5 Electrical Conducting Properties of Organic Materials 4.6 Suitable Organic Materials for Solar Cell Application Chapter 5 Interface between Organic and Inorganic Materials Wei-Fang Su 5.1 Interface between Transparent Electrode and Substrate 5.2 Interface between Transparent Electrode and Active Layer 5.3 Interface between Donor and Acceptor of Active Layer 5.4 Interface between Active Layer and Metal Electrode 5.5 Impedance Characteristics at the Interface Chapter 6 Inorganic Solar Cells I-Chun Cheng 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Basic Principles 6.2.1 P-N Junction in Equilibrium 6.2.2 Current-Voltage Characteristics 6.2.3 Photovoltaic Current-Voltage Characteristics 6.2.4 Series and Shunt Resistances 6.3 Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells 6.4 Thin Film Solar Cells 6.4.1 Amorphous Silicon-Based Thin Film Solar Cells 6.4.2 CdTe Thin Film Solar Cells 6.4.3 CuInSe2 - Based Thin Film Solar Cells 6.5 Outlook Chapter 7 Organic Solar Cells Ching-Fuh Lin 7.1 Dye Sensitized Solar Cell 7.1.1 Structure of DSSC 7.1.2 Principle of DSSC and Development of Dye 7.1.3 Solid-State Dye-Sensitized Solar Cell 7.2 Organic Molecule Solar Cell 7.3 Polymer Solar Cell 7.3.1 Principle of Polymer Solar Cell 7.3.2 Polymer: Fullerene Solar Cell 7.3.3 Effect of Active Layer Morphology on the Performance of Solar Cell 7.3.4 Polymer: Semiconducting Nanoparticle Solar Cell 7.4 Scale Up, Stability and Commercial Development of Organic Solar Cell Chapter 8 Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells Ching-Fuh Lin 8.1 Fundamental Concepts for Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.2 Sandwiched Structures of the Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.2.1 Fabrication of Sandwiched Structures 8.2.2 Performance of Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells with Sandwiched Structures 8.2.3 Crystal Phase of Metal Oxides used for Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3 Effect of Mixed-Oxide Modification on Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3.1 Effect of Mixed Oxide on P3HT:PCBM -Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3.2 Effect of Mixed Oxides on PV2000-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3.3 Enhancement of Optical Absorption and Incident Photon-to-Electron Conversion Efficiency 8.4 Improvement of Stability 8.4.1 Improvement of Stability Using Mixed Oxides of WO3 and V2O5 8.4.2 Improvement of Stability Using Sol-Gel Processed CuOx 8.5 Organic-Nanostructured-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.5.1 Organic-ZnO Nanorod Hybrid Solar Cells 8.5.1.1 Growth of ZnO Nanorods 8.5.1.2 Influence of Drying Time 8.5.1.3 Effect of Additional PCBM Clusters Deposited on ZnO Nanorod Arrays 8.5.2 Effect of Additional Layer of TiO2 Rods Deposited on ZnO Film 8.5.2.1 Effect of NiO Layer 8.5.2.2 Effect of TiO2 Nanorods 8.5.2.3 Influence of TiO2 Nanorods on the Surface Morphology 8.5.2.4 Overall Effect of TiO2 Nanorods on the Device Characteristics 8.6 Hybrid Solar cells using Low-Bandgap Polymers 8.6.1 Low-Bandgap Polymers in the Sandwiched Structure 8.6.2 Improved Stability with Low-Bandgap Polymers in the Sandwiched Structure 8.7 Si Nanowire-Organic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.7.1 Fabrication of SiNWs 8.7.2 The Fabrication of SiNW-organic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.7.3 The Characteristics of SiNW-Organic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.7.4 The Influence of Si NW Length Chapter 9 Outlook of Hybrid Solar Cell Wei-Fang Su References Exercises Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe science of measurement and instrumentation is a multidisciplinary study.Table of ContentsPREFACE xv ACRONYMS xviiI FUNDAMENTALS 11 MEASUREMENT MODELS AND UNCERTAINTY 3Alessandro Ferrero and Dario Petri1.1 Introduction 31.2 Measurement and Metrology 41.3 Measurement Along the Centuries 51.3.1 Measurement in Ancient Greece 61.3.2 Measurement in the Roman Empire 61.3.3 Measurement in the Renaissance Period 71.3.4 Measurement in the Modern Age 81.3.5 Measurement Today 91.4 Measurement Model 101.4.1 A First Measurement Model 111.4.2 A More Complex Measurement Model 161.4.3 Final Remarks 191.5 Uncertainty in Measurement 201.5.1 The Origin of the Doubt 211.5.2 The Different Effects on the Measurement Result 231.5.3 The Final Effect 251.6 Uncertainty Definition and Evaluation 271.6.1 The Error Concept and Why it Should be Abandoned 281.6.2 Uncertainty Definition: The GUM Approach 291.6.3 Evaluating Standard Uncertainty 311.6.4 The Combined Standard Uncertainty 351.7 Conclusions 39Further Reading 40References 41Exercises 412 THE SYSTEM OF UNITS AND THE MEASUREMENT STANDARDS 47Franco Cabiati2.1 Introduction 472.2 Role of the Unit in the Measurement Process 482.3 Ideal Structure of a Unit System 502.4 Evolution of the Unit Definition 522.5 The SI System of Units 532.6 Perspectives of Future SI Evolution 592.7 Realization of Units and Primary Standards 622.7.1 Meter Realization and Length Standards 652.7.2 Kilogram Realization and Mass Standards: Present Situation 662.7.3 Kilogram Realization: Future Perspective 672.7.4 Realization of the Second and Time Standards 692.7.5 Electrical Unit Realizations and Standards: Present Situation 712.7.6 Electrical Units Realization and Standards: Future Perspective 762.7.7 Kelvin Realization and Temperature Standards: Present Situation 782.7.8 Kelvin Realization and Temperature Standards: Future Perspective 792.7.9 Mole Realization: Present Situation 802.7.10 Mole Realization: Future Perspective 812.7.11 Candela Realization and Photometric Standards 822.8 Conclusions 83Further Reading 83References 84Exercises 843 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING IN MEASUREMENT 87Alessandro Ferrero and Claudio Narduzzi3.1 Introduction 873.2 Sampling Theory 883.2.1 Sampling and Fourier Analysis 893.2.2 Band-Limited Signals 923.2.3 Interpolation 953.3 Measurement Algorithms for Periodic Signals 963.3.1 Sampling Periodic Signals 973.3.2 Estimation of the RMS Value 993.4 Digital Filters 1023.5 Measuring Multi-Frequency Signals 1063.5.1 Finite-Length Sequences 1073.5.2 Discrete Fourier Transform 1113.5.3 Uniform Window 1133.5.4 Spectral Leakage 1143.5.5 Leakage Reduction by the Use of Windows 1163.6 Statistical Measurement Algorithms 1193.7 Conclusions 120Further Reading 121References 122Exercises 1224 AD AND DA CONVERSION 125Niclas Björsell4.1 Introduction 1254.2 Sampling 1254.2.1 Quantization 1264.2.2 Sampling Theorem 1294.2.3 Signal Reconstruction 1304.2.4 Anti-Alias Filter 1334.3 Analog-to-Digital Converters 1334.3.1 Flash ADCs 1334.3.2 Pipelined ADCs 1344.3.3 Integrating ADCs 1344.3.4 Successive Approximation Register ADCs 1354.4 Critical ADC Parameters 1354.4.1 Gain and Offset 1364.4.2 Integral and Differential Non-linearity 1374.4.3 Total Harmonic Distortion and Spurious-Free Dynamic Range 1394.4.4 Effective Number of Bits 1394.5 Sampling Techniques 1394.5.1 Oversampling 1394.5.2 Sigma-Delta, ΣΔ 1404.5.3 Dither 1414.5.4 Time-Interleaved 1424.5.5 Undersampling 1424.5.6 Harmonic Sampling 1434.5.7 Equivalent-Time Sampling 1434.5.8 Model-Based Post-correction 1444.6 DAC 1444.6.1 Binary-Weighted 1444.6.2 Kelvin Divider 1454.6.3 Segmented 1454.6.4 R-2R 1454.6.5 PWM DAC 1454.7 Conclusions 146Further Reading 146References 146Exercises 1475 BASIC INSTRUMENTS: MULTIMETERS 149Daniel Slomovitz5.1 Introduction 1495.2 History 1505.3 Main Characteristics 1535.3.1 Ranges 1535.3.2 Number of Digits and Resolution 1555.3.3 Accuracy 1585.3.4 Loading Effects 1595.3.5 Guard 1605.3.6 Four Terminals 1615.3.7 Accessories 1625.3.8 AC Measurements 1645.3.9 Safety 1675.3.10 Calibration 1705.3.11 Selection 1715.4 Conclusions 171Further Reading 172References 172Exercises 1736 BASIC INSTRUMENTS: OSCILLOSCOPES 175Jorge Fernandez Daher6.1 Introduction 1756.2 Types of Waveforms 1766.2.1 Sinewave 1766.2.2 Square or Rectangular Wave 1766.2.3 Triangular or Sawtooth Wave 1766.2.4 Pulses 1776.3 Waveform Measurements 1776.3.1 Amplitude 1776.3.2 Phase Shift 1776.3.3 Period and Frequency 1776.4 Types of Oscilloscopes 1776.5 Oscilloscope Controls 1816.5.1 Vertical Controls 1836.5.2 Horizontal Controls 1846.5.3 Trigger System 1856.5.4 Display System 1876.6 Measurements 1886.6.1 Peak-to-Peak Voltage 1886.6.2 RMS Voltage 1886.6.3 Rise Time 1886.6.4 Fall Time 1886.6.5 Pulse Width 1886.6.6 Period 1906.6.7 Frequency 1906.6.8 Phase Shift Measurements 1906.6.9 Mathematical Functions 1906.7 Performance Characteristics 1916.7.1 Bandwidth 1916.7.2 Rise Time 1916.7.3 Channels 1936.7.4 Vertical Resolution 1936.7.5 Gain Accuracy 1936.7.6 Horizontal Accuracy 1936.7.7 Record Length 1936.7.8 Update Rate 1946.7.9 Connectivity 1956.8 Oscilloscope Probes 1956.8.1 Passive Probes 1966.8.2 Active Probes 1976.9 Using the Oscilloscope 1996.9.1 Grounding 1996.9.2 Calibration 1996.10 Conclusions 199Further Reading 200References 200Exercises 2017 FUNDAMENTALS OF HARD AND SOFT MEASUREMENT 203Luca Mari, Paolo Carbone and Dario Petri7.1 Introduction 2037.2 A Characterization of Measurement 2067.2.1 Measurement as Value Assignment 2067.2.2 Measurement as Process Performed by a Metrological System 2097.2.3 Measurement as Process Conveying Quantitative Information 2097.2.4 Measurement as Morphic Mapping 2107.2.5 Measurement as Mapping on a Given Reference Scale 2137.2.6 Measurement as Process Conveying Objective and Inter-Subjective Information 2157.2.7 The Operative Structure of Measurement 2167.2.8 A Possible Definition of “Measurement” 2197.2.9 Hard Measurements and Soft Measurements 2207.2.10 Multidimensional Properties 2227.3 A Conceptual Framework of the Structure of Measurement 2237.3.1 Goal Setting 2257.3.2 Modeling 2287.3.3 Design 2417.3.4 Execution: Setup, Data Acquisition, Information Extraction and Reporting 2437.3.5 Interpretation 2457.4 An Application of the Measurement Structure Framework: Assessing Versus Measuring Research Quality 2467.4.1 Motivations for Research Quality Measurement 2467.4.2 Measurement Goal Definition 2477.4.3 Modeling 2507.4.4 Design 2527.4.5 Execution 2547.4.6 Interpretation 2557.5 Conclusions 256Further Reading 257References 257Exercises 260II APPLICATIONS 2638 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 265Gerd Vandersteen8.1 Introduction 2658.2 A First Example: The Resistive Divider 2658.3 A First Trial of Estimators 2678.4 From Trial-and-Error to a General Framework 2688.4.1 Setting up the Estimator 2698.4.2 Uncertainty on the Estimates 2708.4.3 Model Validation 2718.4.4 Extracting the Noise Model 2748.5 Practical Identification Framework for Instrumentation and Measurements 2778.5.1 Dynamic Linear Time-Invariant (LTI) Systems 2778.5.2 From Linear to Nonlinear Systems 2808.5.3 Sine Fitting 2808.5.4 Calibration and Compensation Techniques 2828.6 Conclusions 282Further Reading 283References 283Exercises 2859 RELIABILITY MEASUREMENTS 287Marcantonio Catelani9.1 Introduction 2879.2 Brief Remarks on the Concept of Quality 2889.3 Reliability, Failure and Fault: Basic Concepts and Definitions 2889.4 Reliability Theory 2929.4.1 Reliability Models and Measures Related to Time to Failure 2929.4.2 Life Distributions 2989.4.3 Reliability Parameters 3009.4.4 The Bath-Tube Curve 3029.5 System Reliability Assessment 3039.5.1 Series Configuration 3049.5.2 Parallel Configuration 3059.5.3 k-out-of-n Configuration 3079.6 Analysis Techniques for Dependability 3109.6.1 Failure Modes and Effect Analysis 3119.6.2 Fault Tree Analysis 3129.7 Conclusions 313Further Reading 314References 314Exercises 31510 EMC MEASUREMENTS 317Carlo Carobbi10.1 Introduction 31710.2 Definitions and Terminology 31810.3 The Measuring Receiver 32110.3.1 Quasi-Peak Measuring Receivers 32110.3.2 Peak Measuring Receivers 32910.4 Conducted Emission Measurements 32910.4.1 The Artificial Mains Network 32910.4.2 The Current Probe 33210.5 Radiated Emission Measurements 33310.5.1 Antennas for the 9 kHz to 30 MHz Frequency Range 33410.5.2 Antennas for the Frequency Range Above 30 MHz 33510.5.3 Measurement Sites 33910.6 Immunity Tests 34310.6.1 Conducted Immunity Tests 34310.6.2 Radiated Immunity Tests 34610.7 Conclusions 347Further Reading 348References 348Exercises 351PROBLEM SOLUTIONS 353INDEX 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis reference book for system engineers, architects, and managers focuses on how to design, analyze, and deploy Web service-based workflows for both business and scientific applications in a broad domain of healthcare and biomedicine.Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Background and Motivations, 1 1.1.1 Web Service and Service-Oriented Architecture, 1 1.1.2 Workflow Technology, 4 1.2 Overview of Standards, 8 1.2.1 Web Service-Related Standards, 8 1.2.2 Workflow-Related Standards, 19 1.3 Workflow Design: State of the Art, 22 1.3.1 Automatic Service Composition, 22 1.3.2 Mediation-Aided Service Composition, 23 1.3.3 Verification of Service-Based Workflows, 24 1.3.4 Decentralized Execution of Workflows, 25 1.3.5 Scientific Workflow Systems, 26 1.4 Contributions, 27 2. Petri Net Formalism 29 2.1 Basic Petri Nets, 29 2.2 Workflow Nets, 32 2.3 Colored Petri Nets, 35 3. Data-Driven Service Composition 39 3.1 Problem Statement, 40 3.1.1 Domains and Data Relations, 41 3.1.2 Problem Formulation, 43 3.2 Data-Driven Composition Rules, 45 3.2.1 Sequential Composition Rule, 46 3.2.2 Parallel Composition Rule, 46 3.2.3 Choice Composition Rule, 47 3.3 Data-Driven Service Composition, 48 3.3.1 Basic Definitions, 48 3.3.2 Derive AWSP from Service Net, 50 3.4 Effectiveness and Efficiency of the Data-Driven Approach, 55 3.4.1 Solution Effectiveness, 55 3.4.2 Complexity Analysis, 56 3.5 Case Study, 57 3.6 Discussion, 60 3.7 Summary, 61 3.8 Bibliographic Notes, 62 4. Analysis and Composition of Partially-Compatible Web Services 65 4.1 Problem Definition and Motivating Scenario, 65 4.1.1 A Motivating Scenario, 68 4.2 Petri Net Formalism for BPEL Service, Mediation, and Compatibility, 70 4.2.1 CPN Formalism for BPEL Process, 70 4.2.2 CPN Formalism for Service Composition, 73 4.2.3 Mediator and Mediation-Aided Service Composition, 75 4.3 Compatibility Analysis via Petri Net Models, 78 4.3.1 Transforming Abstract BPEL Process to SWF-net, 79 4.3.2 Specifying Data Mapping, 80 4.3.3 Mediator Existence Checking, 81 4.3.4 Proof of Theorem 4.1, 85 4.4 Mediator Generation Approach, 88 4.4.1 Types of Mediation, 88 4.4.2 Guided Mediator Generation, 90 4.5 Bibliographic Notes, 94 4.5.1 Web Service Composition, 94 4.5.2 Business Process Integration, 94 4.5.3 Web Service Configuration, 94 4.5.4 Petri Net Model of BPEL Processes, 94 4.5.5 Component/Web Service Mediation, 95 5. Web Service Configuration with Multiple Quality-of-Service Attributes 99 5.1 Introduction, 99 5.2 Quality-of-Service Measurements, 104 5.2.1 QoS Attributes, 104 5.2.2 Aggregation, 104 5.2.3 Computation of QoS, 105 5.3 Assembly Petri Nets and Their Properties, 107 5.3.1 Assembly and Disassembly Petri Nets, 107 5.3.2 Definition of Incidence Matrix and State-Shift Equation, 110 5.3.3 Definition of Subgraphs and Solutions, 111 5.4 Optimal Web Service Configuration, 114 5.4.1 Web Service Configuration under Single QoS Objective, 115 5.4.2 Web Service Configuration under Multiple QoS Objectives, 116 5.4.3 Experiments and Performance Analysis, 117 5.5 Implementation, 121 5.6 Summary, 123 5.7 Bibliographic Notes, 124 6. A Web Service-Based Public-Oriented Personalized Health Care Platform 127 6.1 Background and Motivation, 127 6.2 System Architecture, 129 6.2.1 The System Architecture of PHISP, 129 6.2.2 Services Encapsulated in PHISP, 131 6.2.3 Composite Service Specifications, 133 6.2.4 User/Domain Preferences, 134 6.3 Web Service Composition with Branch Structures, 137 6.3.1 Basic Ideas and Concepts, 137 6.3.2 Service Composition Planner Supporting Branch Structures, 139 6.3.3 Illustrating Examples, 148 6.4 Web Service Composition with Parallel Structures, 153 6.5 Demonstrations and Results, 155 6.5.1 WSC Example in PHISP, 155 6.5.2 Implementation of PHISP, 158 6.6 Summary, 159 7. Scientific Workflows Enabling Web-Scale Collaboration 161 7.1 Service-Oriented Infrastructure for Science, 162 7.1.1 Service-Oriented Scientific Exploration, 162 7.1.2 Case Study: The Cancer Grid (caGrid), 166 7.2 Scientific Workflows in Service-Oriented Science, 167 7.2.1 Scientific Workflow: Old Wine in New Bottle? 167 7.2.2 caGrid Workflow Toolkit, 174 7.2.3 Exemplary caGrid Workflows, 183 7.3 Summary, 188 8. Network Analysis and Reuse of Scientific Workflows 189 8.1 Social Computing Meets Scientific Workflow, 190 8.1.1 Social Network Services for Scientists, 191 8.1.2 Related Research Work, 197 8.2 Network Analysis of myExperiment, 199 8.2.1 Network Model at a Glance, 199 8.2.2 Undirected Network, 200 8.2.3 Directed Graph, 205 8.2.4 Summary of Findings, 206 8.3 ServiceMap: Providing Map and GPS Assisting Service Composition in Bioinformatics, 207 8.3.1 Motivation, 207 8.3.2 ServiceMap Approach, 209 8.3.3 What Do People Who Use These Services Also Use? 210 8.3.4 What is an Operation Chain Between Services/Operations, 212 8.3.5 An Empirical Study, 218 8.4 Summary, 219 9. Future Perspectives 221 9.1 Workflows in Hosting Platforms, 222 9.2 Workflows Empowered by Social Computing, 223 9.3 Workflows Meeting Big Data, 224 9.4 Emergency Workflow Management, 225 Abbreviations List 227 References 231 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book fills a void in the field of power systems, as an invaluable compendium for researchers, practitioners, as well as graduate students. It covers everything from load and price forecasting, to post-storm service restoration times. It also introduces advanced methods of time series forecasting, as well as neural networks.Table of ContentsPreface and Acknowledgments vii Contributors ix 1. Introduction 1Mohamed E. El-Hawary 2. Univariate Methods for Short-Term Load Forecasting 17James W. Taylor and Patrick E. McSharry 3. Application of theWeighted Nearest Neighbor Method to Power System Forecasting Problems 41Antonio Gomez-Exposito, Alicia Troncoso, Jesus M. Riquelme-Santos, Catalina Gomez-Quiles, Jose L. Martýnez-Ramos, and Jose C. Riquelme 4. Electricity Prices as a Stochastic Process 89Yunhe Hou, Chen-Ching Liu, and Harold Salazar 5. Short-Term Forecasting of Electricity Prices Using Mixed Models 153Carolina Garcýa-Martos, Julio Rodrýguez, and Marýa Jesus Sanchez 6. Electricity Price Forecasting Using Neural Networks and Similar Days 215Paras Mandal, Anurag K. Srivastava, Tomonobu Senjyu, and Michael Negnevitsky 7. Estimation of Post-Storm Restoration Times for Electric Power Distribution Systems 251Rachel A. Davidson, Haibin Liu, and Tatiyana V. Apanasovich 8. A Nonparametric Approach for River Flow Forecasting Based on Autonomous Neural Network Models 285Vitor Hugo Ferreira and Alexandre P. Alves da Silva Index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides options for implementing IPv6 and IPv6 multicast in service provider networks New technologies, viewing paradigms, and content distribution approaches are taking the TV/video services industry by storm. Linear and Nonlinear Video and TV Applications: Using IPv6 and IPv6 Multicast identifies five emerging trends in next-generation delivery of entertainment-quality video. These trends are observable and can be capitalized upon by progressive service providers, telcos, cable operators, and ISPs. This comprehensive guide explores these evolving directions in the TV/video services industry, including worldwide deployment of IPv6, IPTV services, web-produced video content, and the plethora of different screens available, from TV to iPad. It offers practical suggestions as to how these technologies can be implemented in service provider networks to support cost-effective delivery of entertainment, and how new revenue-generating services can be brought to markeTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Evolving Viewing Paradigms 1 1.1 Overview of the Evolving Environment 1 1.2 New Content Sources and Sinks 14 1.3 Technology Trends (Snapshot) 23 1.4 Revenue-Generation Trends 29 1.5 General Infrastructure Implications for Service Providers 29 1.6 Scope of the Investigation 36 2 An Overview of IPv6 45 2.1 Overview and Motivations 45 2.2 Address Capabilities 50 2.2.1 IPv4 Addressing and Issues 50 2.2.2 IPv6 Address Space 51 2.3 IPv6 Protocol Overview 56 2.4 Header Compression Schemes 66 2.5 Quality of Service (QoS) in IPv6 70 2.6 Migration Strategies to IPv6 71 2.6.1 Technical Approaches 71 2.6.2 Residential Broadband Services in an IPv6 Environment 75 2.6.3 Deployment Opportunities 76 3 An Overview of IP Multicast and Multicast Principles 95 3.1 Multicast Environment 95 3.2 Basic Multicast Concepts and Protocols 98 3.3 IP Multicast Addresses 103 3.4 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 107 4 IPv6 Multicast Approaches 115 4.1 Overview 115 4.2 IPv6 Multicast Addresses 116 4.3 Media Access Control (MAC) Layer Addresses Aspects 118 4.4 Signaling 119 4.5 Routing 119 4.6 Rendezvous Point (RP) Approaches 121 4.7 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) 123 4.7.1 Overview of MLDv1 123 4.7.2 Message Format 124 4.7.3 Protocol Description 126 4.7.4 State Transition for Nodes 128 4.7.5 State Transition for Routers 130 4.7.6 Overview of MLDv2 132 4.7.7 Source Filtering 137 5 Evolving Traditional and Nontraditional TV Services 139 5.1 Basic Services 139 5.1.1 Distributed Content Service 140 5.1.2 Interactive Services 141 5.1.3 Public Interest Services 142 5.2 Advanced Services 142 5.2.1 Linear TV with Trick Mode 143 5.2.2 Personal Video Recorder (PVR) Services 143 5.2.3 Advertising Services 144 5.2.4 Audience Measurement Information 145 5.2.5 Interactive Services Requiring High Security 145 6 IPTV Systems and Technologies 147 6.1 Overview and Stakeholder Universe 148 6.1.1 Definitions 148 6.1.2 Services under Consideration 150 6.1.3 IPTV Stakeholder Universe 156 6.1.4 Market Scope 157 6.1.5 Multicast Mechanisms 159 6.2 IPTV Architectures and Architectural Requirements 160 6.3 QoE and QoS 166 6.3.1 QoE Aspects 166 6.3.2 QoS Aspects 173 6.4 Service Security and Content Protection 176 6.5 IPTV Networks 176 6.5.1 IPTV Multicast Frameworks 183 6.5.2 Control and Signaling Aspects 186 6.5.3 Content Delivery 187 6.6 End Systems and Interoperability Aspects 188 6.6.1 IPTV Terminal Devices 188 6.6.2 Home Network 199 6.6.3 Audience Information 202 6.7 Middleware, Application, and Content Platforms 204 6.7.1 IPTV Metadata 204 6.7.2 IPTV Middleware Architecture 206 6.7.3 Content Provisioning 208 6.7.4 Service Discovery 208 6.7.5 Service Navigation 210 6.7.6 Electronic Program Guide 212 6.7.7 User Profiles 213 6.7.8 Protocol Support Machinery for Middleware, Application, and Content Platforms 214 6.8 IPTV Standards: A Comprehensive Process 217 6.8.1 ITU-T 218 6.8.2 ATIS IPTV Interoperability Forum (IIF) 220 6.8.3 Commercial Products and Interworking 226 7 Technologies for Internet-Based TV 240 7.1 Streaming 240 7.1.1 Real-Time Transport Protocol/Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTP/RTSP) 243 7.1.2 Apple HTTP Live Streaming 248 7.1.3 HTTP Flash Progressive Download 252 7.2 Content Delivery Networks 252 7.3 P2P Networks 256 7.4 Cloud Computing 257 7.5 Core Internet Technologies 260 7.5.1 Very High-Capacity Backbone Networks, Transmission 260 7.5.2 Very High-Capacity Backbone Networks, Routing 268 7.5.3 Terrestrial Trends in Access Networks 269 7.6 Storage Technologies to Support IBTV 282 7.7 Service Provider Strategies for NTTV 294 7.7.1 Overview 294 7.7.2 Discussion 296 8 Nontraditional Video Display and Content Sources 308 8.1 NTTV Trends 308 8.2 NTTV Display Units 309 8.3 NTTV Content Sources 311 8.3.1 Hulu 316 8.3.2 Apple 316 8.3.3 Boxee 316 8.3.4 Clicker 319 8.3.5 Revision3 Internet Television 319 8.3.6 Next New Networks 321 8.3.7 UltraViolet 321 8.3.8 Netflix 322 References 323 Glossary 324 Index 390 About the Author 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on imaging aspects of bistatic Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) signal processing, this book covers resolution analysis, echo generation methods, imaging algorithms, imaging parameter estimation, and motion compensation methods.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii List of Acronyms xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview of SAR Development 1 1.1.1 The History of SAR Development 1 1.1.2 The Current Status and Trends of SAR Development 3 1.2 Brief Introduction of Bistatic SAR 8 1.2.1 Basic Concept of Bistatic SAR 8 1.2.2 The Advantages and the Prospects of Bistatic SAR 8 1.2.3 The Present Status of Bistatic SAR Development 9 1.2.4 The Key Problems of Bistatic SAR 11 1.3 Contents of the Book 13 References 14 2 Signal Processing Basis of SAR 17 2.1 Range Resolution of SAR 17 2.1.1 Basic Concept of Range Resolution 17 2.1.2 Classical Theory of SAR Resolution 18 2.1.3 Linear Frequency Modulated Signal (Chirp Signal) 20 2.1.4 Matched Filter 22 2.2 Azimuth Resolution of SAR 24 2.2.1 Basic Concept of Azimuth Resolution 24 2.2.2 Theory of Synthetic Aperture 25 2.2.3 Realizing a Synthetic Aperture Using a Matched Filter 26 2.3 SAR Resolution Cell 29 2.4 SAR Processing Model – Single-Point Target Imaging 32 2.4.1 SAR Echo Model of a Single-Point Target 32 2.4.2 Single-Point Target Imaging 33 2.5 Brief Introduction to Efficient SAR Imaging Algorithms 37 2.5.1 RD Algorithm 38 2.5.2 CS Algorithm 42 2.5.3 ω-k Algorithm 46 2.6 Summary 48 References 49 3 Basic Knowledge of Bistatic SAR Imaging 51 3.1 Bistatic SAR Configurations 51 3.2 Radar Equation of Bistatic SAR 53 3.3 Spatial Resolution of Bistatic SAR 55 3.3.1 Range Resolution 56 3.3.2 Azimuth Resolution 60 3.3.3 Resolution Cell of Bistatic SAR 80 3.4 Summary 80 References 81 4 Echo Simulation of Bistatic SAR 83 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Traditional Monostatic SAR Raw Data Simulation 84 4.2.1 Echo Signal Model and Simulation Theory 84 4.2.2 Implementation of the Simulation 86 4.2.3 Simulation Results 91 4.3 Raw Data Simulation for Translational Invariant Bistatic SAR 96 4.3.1 Short Bistatic Baseline Case 97 4.3.2 Long Bistatic Baseline Case 100 4.4 Summary 109 References 109 5 Imaging Algorithms for Translational Invariant Bistatic SAR 111 5.1 Introduction 111 5.2 Imaging Algorithms Based on Monostatic Transform 114 5.2.1 DMO Method 115 5.2.2 An Explanation of the DMO Method by Synthesizing Narrow Beams 119 5.3 Imaging Algorithms Based on Range History Simplification 120 5.3.1 Baseline Middle-Point Monostatic SAR Approximation 121 5.3.2 Hyperbolic Approximation 124 5.3.3 Advanced Hyperbolic Approximation 147 5.4 Imaging Algorithms Based on Analytical Explicit Spectrums 169 5.4.1 Imaging Algorithm Based on LBF 169 5.4.2 Imaging Algorithm Based on MSR 174 5.4.3 Imaging Algorithm Based on IDW 178 5.5 Imaging Algorithms Based on Accurate Implicit Spectrums 185 5.5.1 Implicit BPTRS 187 5.5.2 Decomposition of the Phase Spectrum 189 5.5.3 The Residual Phase Error and Phase Error Compensation 193 5.5.4 Simulation Results 196 5.6 Comparison of the Algorithms 204 5.6.1 Comparison of the Wavenumber Domain Algorithms 205 5.6.2 Comparison of the Wavenumber Domain Algorithms and the Range-Doppler Domain Algorithms 207 5.7 Summary 209 References 209 6 Imaging Algorithm for Translational Variant Bistatic SAR 213 6.1 Introduction 213 6.2 Imaging Algorithms for One-Stationary Bistatic SAR 214 6.2.1 Imaging Geometry and Signal Model 214 6.2.2 NLCS Algorithm Based on Azimuth Perturbation for the Strip Mode 216 6.2.3 Algorithm Based on the Keystone Transform for the Spotlight Mode 231 6.2.4 Algorithm for the One-Stationary Forward-Looking Configuration 244 6.3 Imaging Algorithms for Translational Variant Bistatic SAR with Constant Velocities 253 6.3.1 Imaging Geometry and the Signal Model 254 6.3.2 Imaging Processing Based on BPTRS 256 6.3.3 Imaging Processing Based on NuSAR 257 6.3.4 Simulations 262 6.4 Summary 269 References 270 7 Bistatic SAR Parameter Estimation and Motion Compensation 273 7.1 Introduction 273 7.2 Analyzing the Effects of Motion Errors 274 7.2.1 Attitude Error Analysis 274 7.2.2 Motion Error Analysis 277 7.3 Estimation of Doppler Parameters 284 7.3.1 Definition of the Doppler Centroid 285 7.3.2 Doppler Centroid Estimation Method Based on a Time–Frequency Domain Pre-Filter 287 7.4 Principle and Methods of SAR Motion Compensation 297 7.4.1 Principle of Motion Compensation 297 7.4.2 Sensor-Based Motion Compensation 299 7.4.3 SAR Data-Based Motion Compensation 306 7.5 Summary 310 References 310 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Second Edition of OFDM Baseband Receiver Design for Wirless Communications, this book expands on the earlier edition with enhanced coverage of MIMO techniques, additional baseband algorithms, and more IC design examples. The authors cover the full range of OFDM technology, from theories and algorithms to architectures and circuits. The book gives a concise yet comprehensive look at digital communication fundamentals before explaining signal processing algorithms in receivers. The authors give detailed treatment of hardware issues - from architecture to IC implementation. Links OFDM and MIMO theory with hardware implementation Enables the reader to transfer communication received concepts into hardware; design wireless receivers with acceptable implemntation loss; achieve low-power designs Covers the latest standards, such as DVB-T2, WiMax, LTE and LTE-A Includes more baseband algorithms, like soft-decoding algorithms such as Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xvii Acknowledgements xix List of Abbreviations and Acronyms xxi Part One: Fundamentals of Wireless Communication 1. Introduction 3 1.1 Digital Broadcasting Systems 3 1.1.1 Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) 4 1.1.2 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) 4 1.2 Mobile Cellular Systems 6 1.2.1 Carrier Aggregation 8 1.2.2 Multiple-Antenna Configuration 8 1.2.3 Relay Transmission 9 1.2.4 Coordinated Multipoint Transmission and Reception (CoMP) 9 1.3 Wireless Network Systems 10 1.3.1 Personal Area Network (PAN) 10 1.3.2 Local Area Network (LAN) 12 1.3.3 Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) 13 1.3.4 Wide Area Network (WAN) 14 Summary 14 References 15 2. Digital Modulation 17 2.1 Single-Carrier Modulation 17 2.1.1 Power Spectral Densities of Modulation Signals 18 2.1.2 PSK, QAM, and ASK 19 2.1.3 CPFSK and MSK 22 2.1.4 Pulse Shaping and Windowing 23 2.2 Multi-Carrier Modulation 24 2.2.1 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing 27 2.2.2 OFDM Related Issues 27 2.2.3 OFDM Transceiver Architecture 31 2.3 Adaptive OFDM 33 Summary 37 References 37 3. Advanced Wireless Technology 39 3.1 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) 39 3.1.1 Introduction 39 3.1.2 MIMO Basics 41 3.1.3 MIMO Techniques 43 3.1.4 MIMO-OFDM System Example 50 3.2 Multiple Access 53 3.2.1 Frequency-Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 54 3.2.2 Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 54 3.2.3 Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 55 3.2.4 Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA) 57 3.2.5 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 57 3.2.6 Space-Division Multiple Access (SDMA) 58 3.3 Spread Spectrum and CDMA 59 3.3.1 PN Codes 60 3.3.2 Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum 63 3.3.3 Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum 65 Summary 66 References 67 4. Error-Correcting Codes 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Block Codes 70 4.2.1 Linear Codes 70 4.2.2 Cyclic Codes 72 4.3 Reed–Solomon Codes 73 4.3.1 Finite Fields 74 4.3.2 Encoding 75 4.3.3 Decoding 76 4.3.4 Shortened Reed–Solomon Codes 76 4.4 Convolutional Codes 77 4.4.1 Encoding 77 4.4.2 Viterbi Decoder 79 4.4.3 Punctured Convolutional Codes 80 4.5 Soft-Input Soft-Output Decoding Algorithms 81 4.5.1 MAP Decoder 82 4.5.2 Log-MAP Decoder 85 4.5.3 Max-Log-MAP Decoder 86 4.6 Turbo Codes 87 4.6.1 Encoding 87 4.6.2 Decoding 88 4.7 Low-Density Parity-Check Codes 89 4.7.1 Encoding 89 4.7.2 Decoding 91 Summary 93 References 94 5. Signal Propagation and Channel Model 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Wireless Channel Propagation 96 5.2.1 Path Loss and Shadowing 96 5.2.2 Multipath Fading 97 5.2.3 Multipath Channel Parameters 98 5.2.4 MIMO Channel 104 5.3 Front-End Electronics Effects 105 5.3.1 Carrier Frequency Offset 105 5.3.2 Sampling Clock Offset 106 5.3.3 Phase Noise 106 5.3.4 IQ Imbalance and DC Offset 107 5.3.5 Power Amplifier Nonlinearity 110 5.4 Channel Model 111 5.4.1 Model for Front-End Impairments 112 5.4.2 Multipath Rayleigh Fader Model 113 5.4.3 Channel Models Used in Standards 116 Summary 122 References 123 Part Two: MIMO-OFDM Receiver Processing 6. Synchronization 127 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Synchronization Issues 128 6.2.1 Synchronization Errors 128 6.2.2 Effects of Synchronization Errors 128 6.2.3 Consideration for Estimation and Compensation 133 6.3 Detection and Estimation of Synchronization Errors 134 6.3.1 Symbol Timing Detection 134 6.3.2 Carrier Frequency Offset Estimation 143 6.3.3 Residual CFO and SCO Estimation 147 6.3.4 Carrier Phase Estimation 149 6.3.5 IQ Imbalance Estimation 150 6.4 Detection and Estimation of Synchronization Errors in MIMO-OFDM Systems 153 6.4.1 Symbol Timing Detection in MIMO-OFDM Systems 153 6.4.2 Carrier Frequency Offset Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 155 6.4.3 Residual CFO and SCO Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 156 6.4.4 Carrier Phase Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 157 6.4.5 IQ Imbalance Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 157 6.5 Recovery of Synchronization Errors 158 6.5.1 Carrier Frequency Offset Compensation 158 6.5.2 Sampling Clock Offset and Common Phase Error Compensation 160 6.5.3 IQ Imbalance Compensation 163 Summary 163 References 164 7. Channel Estimation and Equalization 167 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 Pilot Pattern 168 7.2.1 Pilot Pattern in SISO-OFDM Systems 168 7.2.2 Pilot Pattern in MIMO-OFDM Systems 171 7.3 SISO-OFDM Channel Estimation 174 7.3.1 Channel Estimation by Block-Type Pilot Symbols 177 7.3.2 Channel Estimation by Comb-Type Pilot Symbols 179 7.3.3 Channel Estimation by Grid-Type Pilot Symbols 186 7.4 MIMO-OFDM Channel Estimation 191 7.4.1 Space–Time Pilot 191 7.5 Adaptive Channel Estimation 194 7.6 Equalization 195 7.6.1 One-Tap Equalizer 195 7.6.2 Multi-Tap Equalizer 198 7.7 Iterative Receiver 204 7.7.1 Iterative Synchronization and Channel Estimation 205 7.7.2 Bit-Interleaved Coded Modulation with Iterative Decoding (BICM-ID) 205 Summary 206 References 207 8. MIMO Detection 209 8.1 Introduction 209 8.2 Linear Detection 210 8.2.1 Zero Forcing (ZF) 210 8.2.2 Minimum Mean Squared Error (MMSE) 211 8.3 MIMO Detection with Channel Preprocessing 212 8.3.1 Sorting 212 8.3.2 QR Decomposition 213 8.3.3 MMSE-SQRD 215 8.3.4 Ordered Successive Interference Cancelation (OSIC) 216 8.3.5 Lattice Reduction (LR) 218 8.4 Sphere Decoder 220 8.4.1 Depth-First Tree Search 221 8.4.2 Breadth-First Tree Search 223 8.4.3 Best-First Tree Search 224 8.4.4 Complexity Measurement 227 8.4.5 Design Space Exploration of Sphere Decoder 227 8.5 Soft-Output Sphere Decoder 230 8.5.1 Repeated Tree Search 231 8.5.2 Single Tree Search 232 8.5.3 LLR Clipping 232 8.6 Iterative MIMO Detection 234 8.6.1 List Sphere Decoder 234 8.6.2 Soft-Input Soft-Output Sphere Decoder 235 8.6.3 Iterative SIC-MMSE Detection 237 8.7 Precoding 239 8.7.1 Beam Steering 239 8.7.2 Spatial Decorrelation 241 8.7.3 Limited Feedback 244 8.8 Space Block Code 246 Summary 247 References 248 Part Three: Hardware Design for MIMO-OFDM Receivers 9. Circuit Techniques 253 9.1 Introduction 253 9.2 Fast Fourier Transform Modules 253 9.2.1 FFT Algorithms 254 9.2.2 Architecture 259 9.2.3 Comparison 264 9.3 Delay Buffer 267 9.3.1 SRAM/Register File-Based Delay Buffer 267 9.3.2 Pointer-Based Delay Buffer 268 9.3.3 Gated Clock Strategy 269 9.3.4 Comparison 272 9.4 Circuits for Rectangular-to-Polar Conversion 274 9.4.1 Arctangent Function 274 9.4.2 Magnitude Function 279 9.4.3 Comparison 286 9.5 Circuits for Polar-to-Rectangular Conversion 286 9.5.1 Trigonometric Approximation 287 9.5.2 Polynomial Approximation 288 9.5.3 Comparison 290 Summary 290 References 291 10. MIMO IC Design Examples 293 10.1 Introduction 293 10.2 QR Decomposition IC 294 10.2.1 System Description 294 10.2.2 Algorithm Design 295 10.2.3 Architecture Design 300 10.2.4 Experimental Results 303 10.3 8 × 8 Soft-Output Sphere Decoder 306 10.3.1 Block Description 306 10.3.2 Algorithm Design 306 10.3.3 Architecture Design 307 10.3.4 Experimental Results 316 Summary 318 References 319 11. Mobile MIMO WiMAX System-on-Chip Design 321 11.1 Introduction of WiMAX Standard 321 11.2 Mobile WiMAX OFDMA and Frame Structure 322 11.3 WiMAX Baseband Receiver Design 325 11.3.1 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 325 11.3.2 Packet Detection (PKD) 326 11.3.3 Symbol Timing Recovery (STR) 328 11.3.4 Carrier Frequency Offset (CFO) Compensation 328 11.3.5 Channel Estimation 330 11.3.6 MIMO Detection 330 11.3.7 Outer Receiver 333 11.4 WiMAX Media Access Control (MAC) Design 333 11.5 Implementation and Field Trial of the WiMAX SoC 336 11.5.1 Laboratory Testing and Performance Evaluation 338 11.5.2 Taiwan High Speed Rail Field Trial 340 Summary 341 References 341 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisThoroughly covering channel characteristics and parameters, this book provides the knowledge needed to design various wireless systems, such as cellular communication systems, RFID, and ad hoc wireless communication systems.Table of ContentsPreface xi List of Acronyms and Symbols xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Book Objective 1 1.2 The Historical Context 2 1.3 Book Outline 8 2 Characterization of Propagation Channels 15 2.1 Three Phenomena in Wireless Channels 15 2.2 Path Loss and Shadowing 16 2.3 Multipath Fading 18 2.4 Stochastic Characterization of Multipath Fading 22 2.5 Duality of Multipath Fading 26 2.6 WSSUS Assumption of Multipath Fading 28 2.7 A Review of Propagation Channel Modeling 31 3 Generic Channel Models 41 3.1 Channel Spread Function 43 3.2 Specular-path Model 46 3.3 Dispersive-path Model 51 3.4 Time-evolution Model 54 3.5 Power Spectral Density Model 57 3.6 Model for Keyhole Channel 68 4 Geometry-based Stochastic Channel Modeling 77 4.1 General Modeling Procedure 77 4.2 Regular-shaped Geometry-based Stochastic Models 79 4.3 Irregular-shaped Geometry-based Stochastic Models 83 4.4 Simulation Models 84 4.5 Simulation Models for Non-isotropic Scattering Narrowband SISO V2V Rayleigh Fading Channels 90 5 Channel Measurements 106 5.1 Channel-sounding Equipment/System 107 5.2 Post-processing of Measurement Data 109 5.3 Impact of Phase Noise and Possible Solutions 110 5.4 Directional Radiation Patterns 117 5.5 Switching-mode Selection 124 6 Deterministic Channel-parameter Estimation 145 6.1 Bartlett Beamformer 146 6.2 The MUSIC Algorithm 148 6.3 The ESPRIT and Propagator Methods 150 6.4 Maximum-likelihood Method 152 6.5 The SAGE Algorithm 153 6.6 A Brief Introduction to the RiMAX Algorithm 172 6.7 Evidence-framework-based Algorithms 172 6.8 Extended Kalman-filter-based Tracking Algorithm 178 6.9 Particle-filter-based Tracking Algorithm 188 7 Statistical Channel-parameter Estimation 201 7.1 A Brief Review of Dispersive Parameter Estimators 201 7.2 Dispersive Component Estimation Algorithms 203 7.3 PSD-based Dispersive Component Estimation 218 7.4 Bidirection-delay-Doppler Frequency PSD Estimation 219 8 Measurement-based Statistical Channel Modeling 236 8.1 General Modeling Procedures 237 8.2 Clustering Algorithm based on Specular-path Models 241 8.3 Data Segment-length Selection 245 8.4 Relay and CoMP Channel Modeling 249 9 In Practice: Channel Modeling for Modern Communication Systems 260 9.1 Scenarios for V2V and Cooperative Communications 260 9.2 Channel Characteristics 264 9.3 Scattering Theoretical Channel Models for Conventional Cellular MIMO Systems 265 9.4 Scattering Theoretical Channel Models for V2V Systems 279 9.5 Scattering Theoretical Channel Models for Cooperative MIMO Systems 329 Appendix A 353 Bibliography 378 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the basic physical principles underlying the science and technology of nanophotonics, its materials and structures This volume presents nanophotonic structures and Materials. Nanophotonics is photonic science and technology that utilizes light/matter interactions on the nanoscale where researchers are discovering new phenomena and developing techniques that go well beyond what is possible with conventional photonics and electronics.The topics discussed in this volume are: Cavity Photonics; Cold Atoms and Bose-Einstein Condensates; Displays; E-paper; Graphene; Integrated Photonics; Liquid Crystals; Metamaterials; Micro-and Nanostructure Fabrication; Nanomaterials; Nanotubes; Plasmonics; Quantum Dots; Spintronics; Thin Film Optics Comprehensive and accessible coverage ofthe whole of modern photonics Emphasizes processes and applications that specifically exploit photon attributes of light Deals with the rapidly advancing areaTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi 1 Silicon Photonics 1Wim Bogaerts 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Applications 1 1.3 Optical Functions 3 1.4 Silicon Photonics Technology 10 1.5 Conclusion 15 References 15 2 Cavity Photonics 21J.Mørk P. T. Kristensen P. Kaer M. Heuck Y. Yu and N. Gregersen 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Cavity Fundamentals 22 2.3 Cavity-Based Switches 26 2.4 Emitters in Cavities 32 2.5 Nanocavity Lasers and LEDs 42 2.6 Summary 46 Acknowledgments 47 References 47 3 Metamaterials: State-of-the Art and Future Directions 53Natalia M. Litchinitser and Vladimir M. Shalaev 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Negative-Index Materials 54 3.3 Magnetic Metamaterials 59 3.4 Graded-Index Transition Metamaterials 62 3.5 Transformation Optics 70 3.6 Metasurfaces 75 References 78 4 Quantum Nanoplasmonics 85Mark I. Stockman 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Spaser and Nanoplasmonics with Gain 86 4.3 Adiabatic Hot-Electron Nanoscopy 118 Acknowledgments 125 References 125 5 Dielectric Photonic Crystals 133Robert H. Lipson 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Fundamentals 134 5.3 Fabrication Methods and Materials 145 5.4 Applications 154 5.5 Conclusions 159 References 159 6 Quantum Dots 169Stanley Tsao and Manijeh Razeghi 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Quantum Dots for Infrared Detection 175 6.3 Quantum Dot Growth 179 6.4 Device Fabrication and Measurement Procedures 184 6.5 Gallium Arsenide–Based Quantum Dot Detectors 186 6.6 Indium Phosphide-Based Quantum Dot Detectors 198 6.7 Colloidal Quantum Dots 215 6.8 Conclusion 216 References 217 7 Magnetic Control of Spin in Molecular Photonics 221Eitan Ehrenfreund and Z. Valy Vardeny 7.1 Introduction 221 7.2 A Survey of the Magneto-Electroluminescence in OLEDs 222 7.3 Organic MEL at Small Magnetic Fields; Compass Effect 232 7.4 Magnetic Field Effect on Excited State Spectroscopies in Organic Semiconductor Films 236 7.5 Basic Quantum Mechanical Models Based on Spin-Mixing Manipulation by Magnetic Fields 246 7.6 Summary 254 Acknowledgments 255 References 255 8 Thin-Film Molecular Nanophotonics 261Tetsuzo Yoshimura 8.1 Introduction 261 8.2 Molecular Assembling for Nanoscale Tailored Structures 262 8.3 Molecular Layer Deposition 264 8.4 Organic Multiple Quantum Dots (MQDs) 267 8.5 Self-Organized Lightwave Network 283 8.6 Proposed Applications 292 8.7 Summary 305 References 305 9 Light-Harvesting Materials for Organic Electronics 311Damien Joly Juan Luis Delgado Carmen Atienza and Nazario Martın 9.1 Introduction 311 9.2 Photoinduced Electron Transfer (PET) in Artificial Photosynthetic Systems 313 9.3 Fullerenes for Organic Photovoltaics 323 9.4 Molecular Wires 330 9.5 Conclusions 335 Acknowledgments 335 References 33610 Recent Advances in Metal Oxide-Based Photoelectrochemical Hydrogen Production 343Bob C. Fitzmorris and Jin Z. Zhang 10.1 Introduction 343 10.2 Materials for PEC Hydrogen Production 346 10.3 Conclusion 362 References 363 11 Optical Control of Cold Atoms and Artificial Electromagnetism 371Gediminas Juzeliunas and Patrik Ohberg 11.1 Introduction 371 11.2 Atomic Bose–Einstein Condensates 372 11.3 Optical Forces on Atoms 376 References 393 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the basic physical principles underlying the technology instrumentation of photonics This volume discusses photonics technology and instrumentation. The topics discussed in this volume are: Communication Networks; Data Buffers; Defense and Security Applications; Detectors; Fiber Opticsand Amplifiers; Green Photonics; Instrumentation and Metrology; Interferometers; Light-Harvesting Materials; Logic Devices; Optical Communications; Remote Sensing; Solar Energy; Solid-State Lighting; Wavelength Conversion Comprehensive and accessible coverage of the whole of modern photonics Emphasizes processes and applications that specifically exploit photon attributes of light Deals with the rapidly advancing area of modern optics Chapters are written by top scientists in their field Written for the graduate level student in physical sciences; Industrial and academic researchers in photonics, graduate students iTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi 1 Solid-State Lighting: Toward Smart and Ultraefficient Materials, Devices, Lamps, and Systems 1M. H. Crawford, J. J. Wierer, A. J. Fischer, G. T. Wang, D. D. Koleske, G. S. Subramania, M. E. Coltrin, R. F. Karlicek, Jr., and J. Y. Tsao 1.1 A Brief History of SSL, 1 1.2 Beyond the State-of-the-Art: Smart and Ultraefficient SSL, 10 1.3 Ultraefficient SSL Lighting: Toward Multicolor Semiconductor Electroluminescence, 21 1.4 Smart Solid-State Lighting: Toward Control of Flux and Spectra in Time and Space, 42 1.5 Summary and Conclusions, 46 Acknowledgments, 46 References, 47 2 Integrated Optics Using High Contrast Gratings 57Connie Chang-Hasnain and Weijian Yang 2.1 Introduction, 57 2.2 Physics of Near-Wavelength Grating, 58 2.3 Applications of HCGs, 77 2.4 Summary, 98 Acknowledgments, 98 References, 98 3 Plasmonic Crystals: Controlling Light with Periodically Structured Metal Films 107Wayne Dickson, Gregory A. Wurtz and Anatoly V. Zayats 3.1 Introduction, 107 3.2 Surface Plasmon Polaritons, 110 3.3 Basics of Surface Plasmon Polaritonic Crystals, 113 3.4 Polarization and Wavelength Management with Plasmonic Crystals, 120 3.5 Chirped Plasmonic Crystals: Broadband and Broadangle SPP Antennas Based on Plasmonic Crystals, 138 3.6 Active Control of Light with Plasmonic Crystals, 146 3.7 Conclusion, 160 Acknowledgments, 160 References, 160 4 Optical Holography 169Raymond K. Kostuk 4.1 Introduction, 169 4.2 Basic Concepts in Holography, 169 4.3 Hologram Analysis, 172 4.4 Hologram Geometries, 182 4.5 Holographic Recording Materials, 183 4.6 Digital Holography, 188 4.7 Computer Generated Holography, 193 4.8 Holographic Applications, 198 References, 208 5 Cloaking and Transformation Optics 215Martin W. McCall 5.1 Introduction, 215 5.2 Theoretical Underpinning, 217 5.3 The Carpet Cloak, 226 5.4 Conformal Cloaking, 232 5.5 Spacetime Cloaking, 234 5.6 Conclusion and Outlook: Beyond Optics, 243 Appendix 5.A: Technicalities, 244 Appendix 5.B: Vectors and Tensors in Flat Spacetime, 245 Appendix 5.C: Maxwell’s Equations and Constitutive Relations in Covariant Form, 247 References, 251 6 Photonic Data Buffers 253S. J. B. Yoo 6.1 Introduction, 253 6.2 Applications of Photonic Buffers, 254 6.3 Limitations of Electronics, 258 6.4 Photonic Buffer Technologies, 260 6.5 Integration Efforts, 278 6.6 Summary, 278 References, 278 7 Optical Forces, Trapping and Manipulation 287Halina Rubinsztein-Dunlop, Alexander B. Stilgoe, Darryl Preece, Ann Bui, and Timo A. Nieminen 7.1 Introduction, 287 7.2 Theory of Optical Forces, 293 7.3 Theory of Optical Torques, 301 7.4 Measurement of Forces and Torques, 308 7.5 Calculation of Forces and Torques, 318 7.6 Conclusion, 329 References, 329 8 Optofluidics 341Lin Pang, H. Matthew Chen, Lindsay M. Freeman, and Yeshaiahu Fainman 8.1 Introduction, 341 8.2 Photonics with Fluid Manipulation, 342 8.3 Fluidic Sensing, 350 8.4 Fluidic Enabled Imaging, 353 8.5 Fluid Assisted Nanopatterning, 358 8.6 Conclusions and Outlook, 361 Acknowledgments, 362 References, 362 9 Nanoplasmonic Sensing for Nanomaterials Science 369Elin M. Larsson-Langhammer, Svetlana Syrenova, and Christoph Langhammer 9.1 Introduction, 369 9.2 Nanoplasmonic Sensing and Readout, 370 9.3 Inherent Limitations of Nanoplasmonic Sensors, 373 9.4 Direct Nanoplasmonic Sensing, 373 9.5 Indirect Nanoplasmonic Sensing, 374 9.6 Overview on Different Examples, 376 9.7 Discussion and Outlook, 396 References, 397 10 Laser Fabrication and Nanostructuring 403Cemal Esen and Andreas Ostendorf 10.1 Introduction, 403 10.2 Laser Systems for Nanostructuring, 404 10.3 Surface Structuring by Laser Ablation, 409 10.4 Generation of thin Films by Laser Ablation in Vacuum, 416 10.5 Generation of Nanoparticles by Laser Ablation in Liquids, 419 10.6 Laser Induced Volume Structures, 423 10.7 Direct Writing of Polymer Components via Two-Photon Polymerization, 426 10.8 Conclusion, 431 References, 432 11 Free Electron Lasers for Photonics Technology by Wiley 445George R. Neil and Gwyn P. Williams 11.1 Introduction, 445 11.2 Physical Principles, 446 11.3 Worldwide FEL Status, 462 11.4 Applications, 466 11.5 Summary and Conclusion, 471 References, 471 Index 477

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the basic physical principles underlying Biomedical Photonics, spectroscopy and microscopy This volume discusses biomedical photonics, spectroscopy and microscopy, the basic physical principles underlying the technology andits applications. The topics discussed in this volume are: Biophotonics; Fluorescence and Phosphorescence; Medical Photonics; Microscopy; Nonlinear Optics; Ophthalmic Technology; Optical Tomography; Optofluidics; Photodynamic Therapy; Image Processing; Imaging Systems; Sensors; Single Molecule Detection; Futurology in Photonics. Comprehensive and accessible coverage of the whole of modern photonics Emphasizes processes and applications that specifically exploit photon attributes of light Deals with the rapidly advancing area of modern optics Chapters are written by top scientists in their field Written for the graduate level student in physical sciences; Industrial and academic researchers in pTrade Review"Even though the book was written by a number of authors, they succeeded in making it interesting, clear and up-to-date." (Optics and Photonics 2016)Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xiii 1 Fluorescence 1 David J. S. Birch, Yu Chen, and Olaf J. Rolinski 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Spectra 2 1.3 Quantum Yield 6 1.4 Lifetime 12 1.5 Quenching 23 1.6 Anisotropy 30 1.7 Microscopy 38 1.8 Conclusions 48 Acknowledgments 48 References 49 2 Single-Molecule Detection and Spectroscopy 59 Michel Orrit 2.1 Introduction 59 2.2 Experimental Setups 62 2.3 Fluorescence Spectroscopy 66 2.4 Fluorescence Correlation Spectroscopy 72 2.5 Fluorescence Excitation Spectroscopy 78 2.6 Other Detection Methods 86 2.7 Conclusion 93 Acknowledgments 94 References 94 3 Resonance Energy Transfer 101 David L. Andrews, David S. Bradshaw, Rayomond Dinshaw, and Gregory D. Scholes 3.1 Introduction 101 3.2 History of RET 102 3.3 The Photophysics of RET 103 3.4 Investigative Applications of RET in Molecular Biology 113 3.5 The Role of RET in Light-Harvesting Complexes 118 Acknowledgments 122 References 122 4 Biophotonics of Photosynthesis 129 Valter Zazubovich and Ryszard Jankowiak 4.1 Introduction 129 4.2 Structure of Pigment–Protein Complexes and Structure–Function Relationships 130 4.3 Key Concepts in Physics of Pigment–Protein Complexes 133 4.4 Experimental Techniques 141 4.5 Examples 145 4.6 Conclusions 156 Acknowledgments 157 References 157 5 Optical Sectioning Microscopy and Biological Imaging 165 John Girkin 5.1 Introduction and Background 165 5.2 Confocal Imaging 168 5.3 Nonlinear Microscopy 172 5.4 Practical Implementation of Nonlinear Microscopy 181 5.5 Recent Advances in Nonlinear Microscopy 184 5.6 Widefield Optical Sectioning by Specialized Illumination Methods 186 5.7 Summary 190 References 191 6 Cell Handling, Sorting, and Viability 197 Darwin Palima, Thomas Aabo, Andrew Bañas, and Jesper Glückstad 6.1 Handling Cells with Light 198 6.2 Optical Sorting 215 6.3 Cell Viability 220 References 230 7 Tissue Polarimetry 239 Alex Vitkin, Nirmalya Ghosh, and Antonello de Martino 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Polarized Light Fundamentals 240 7.3 Instrumentation 266 7.4 Forward Modeling and Testing in Phantoms 282 7.5 Applications 297 7.6 Conclusions and Outlook 313 References 314 8 Optical Waveguide Biosensors 323 Daphné Duval and Laura M. Lechuga 8.1 Introduction 323 8.2 Fundamentals of Label-Free Optical Waveguide Biosensing 324 8.3 Surface Biofunctionalization 328 8.4 Evaluation of Optical Biosensors 331 8.5 Integrated Optical Waveguide-Based Biosensors 334 8.6 Optical Fiber-Based Biosensors 349 8.7 Lab-On-A-Chip Integration 354 8.8 Summary 357 References 358 9 Light Propagation in Highly Scattering Turbid Media: Concepts, Techniques, and Biomedical Applications 367 R. R. Alfano, W. B. Wang, L. Wang, and S. K. Gayen 9.1 Introduction 367 9.2 Physics Behind Optical Imaging Through a Highly Scattering Turbid Medium 369 9.3 Study of Ballistic and Diffused Light Components 378 9.4 Photon-Sorting Gates 384 9.5 Transition From Ballistic to Diffuse Imaging in Turbid Media 402 9.6 Conclusion 404 Acknowledgments 404 References 404 10 Photodynamic Therapy 413 Rakkiyappan Chandran, Tyler G. St. Denis, Daniela Vecchio, Pinar Avci, Magesh Sadasivam, and Michael R. Hamblin 10.1 Historical Overview of PDT 413 10.2 Introduction to PDT 415 10.3 Photosensitizer Structure and Photophysical Properties 418 10.4 Light Dosimetry and Photodynamic Therapy Light Sources 422 10.5 Light-Based Strategies to Enhance PDT 423 10.6 PDT Targeting and Nanotechnology 425 10.7 PDT for Dermatology 428 10.8 PDT for Oncology 433 10.9 PDT for Infectious Disease 435 10.10 PDT in Ophthalmology 445 10.11 PDT and The Immune System 446 10.12 Conclusion 449 Acknowledgment 449 References 449 11 Imaging and Probing Cells Beyond the Optical Diffraction Limit 469 Mark Schüttpelz and Thomas Huser 11.1 The Quest for Achieving Optical Resolution Beyond ABBE’S Limit 469 11.2 Stimulated Emission Depletion Microscopy 474 11.3 Photoactivated Localization Microscopy and Stochastic Optical Reconstruction Microscopy 477 11.4 Structured Illumination Microscopy 483 11.5 Super-Resolution Optical Fluctuation Imaging and Other Approaches 491 11.6 Outlook 495 Acknowledgments 496 References 497 12 Technology 503 Ann E. Elsner and Christopher A. Clark 12.1 Basic Ocular Anatomy and Physiology 503 12.2 Measurement Techniques 514 12.3 Anterior Segment Diagnostics, Refractive Measurements, and Treatment 522 12.4 Diagnostic Applications and Treatment of Posterior Segment 529 References 534 Index 543

Read more less

Book SynopsisDescribing an innovative approach to phased-array control in antenna design This book explores in detail phased-array antennas that use coupled-oscillator arrays, an arrangement featuring a remarkably simple beam steering control system and a major reduction in complexity compared with traditional methods of phased-array control. It brings together in one convenient, self-contained volume the many salient research results obtained over the past ten to fifteen years in laboratories around the world, including the California Institute of Technology''s Jet Propulsion Laboratory. The authors examine the underlying theoretical framework of coupled-oscillator systems, clearly explaining the linear and nonlinear formalisms used in the development of coupled-oscillator arrays, while introducing a variety of state-of-the-art methodologies, design solutions, and tools for applying this control scheme. Readers will find: Numerous implementation examples of couTable of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xvii Authors xix PART I: THEORY AND ANALYSIS 1 Chapter 1 Introduction—Oscillators and Synchronization 3 1.1 Early Work in Mathematical Biology and Electronic Circuits 3 1.2 van der Pol's Model 5 1.3 Injection Locking (Adier's Formalism) and Its Spectra (Locked and Unlocked) 7 1.4 Mutual Injection Locking of Two Oscillators 21 1.5 Conclusion 26 Chapter 2 Coupled-Oscillator Arrays-Basic Analytical Description and Operating Principles 27 2.1 Fundamental Equations 28 2.2 Discrete Model Solution (Linearization and Laplace Transformation) 31 2.3 Steady-State Solution 37 2.4 Stability of the Phase Solution in the Full Nonlinear Formulation 41 2.5 External Injection Locking 46 2.6 Generalization to Planar Arrays 50 2.7 Coupling Networks 54 2.8 Conclusion 66 Chapter 3 The Continuum Model for Linear Arrays 67 3.1 The Linear Array without External Injection 68 3.2 The Linear Array with External Injection 81 3.3 Beam-Steering via End Detuning 93 3.4 Beam-Steering via End Injection 95 3.5 Conclusion 102 Chapter 4 The Continuum Model for Planar Arrays 103 4.1 Cartesian Coupling in the Continuum Model without External Injection 103 4.2 Cartesian Coupling in the Continuum Model with External Injection 109 4.3 Non-Cartesian Coupling Topologies 118 4.4 Conclusion 137 Chapter 5 Causality and Coupling Delay 139 5.1 Coupling Delay 139 5.2 The Discrete Model with Coupling Delay 141 5.3 The Continuum Model with Coupling Delay 146 5.4 Beam Steering in the Continuum Model with Coupling Delay 159 5.5 Conclusion 173 PART II: EXPERIMENTAL WORK AND APPLICATIONS 175 Chapter 6 Experimental Validation of the Theory 177 6.1 Linear-Array Experiments 177 6.2 Planar-Array Experiments 188 6.3 Receive-Array Experiments 201 6.4 Phase Noise 210 6.5 The Unlocked State 213 6.6 Conclusion 215 PART III: NONLINEAR BEHAVIOR 217 Chapter 7 Perturbation Models for Stability, Phase Noise, and Modulation 219 7.1 Preliminaries of Dynamical Systems 220 7.2 Bifurcations of Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 226 7.3 The Averaging Method and Multiple Time Scales 230 7.4 Averaging Theory in Coupled Oscillator Systems 231 7.5 Obtaining the Parameters of the van der Pol Oscillator Model 235 7.6 An Alternative Perturbation Model for Coupled-Oscillator Systems 238 7.7 Matrix Equations for the Steady State and Stability Analysis 242 7.8 A Comparison between the Two Perturbation Models for Coupled Oscillator Systems 246 7.9 Externally Injection-Locked COAs 247 7.10 Phase Noise 250 7.11 Modulation 256 7.12 Coupled Phase-Locked Loops 258 7.13 Conclusion 261 Chapter 8 Numerical Methods for Simulating Coupled-Oscillator Arrays 263 8.1 Introduction to Numerical Methods 264 8.2 Obtaining Periodic Steady-State Solutions of Autonomous Circuits in Harmonic-Balance Simulators 270 8.3 Numerical Analysis of a Voltage-Controlled Oscillator 272 8.4 Numerical Analysis of a Five-Element Linear Coupled-Oscillator Array 278 8.5 Numerical Analysis of an Externally Injection-Locked Five-Element Linear Coupled-Oscillator Array 286 8.6 Harmonic Radiation for Extended Scanning Range 288 8.7 Numerical Analysis of a Self-Oscillating Mixer 291 8.8 Conclusion 296 Chapter 9 Beamforming in Coupled-Oscillator Arrays 297 9.1 Preliminary Concepts of Convex Optimization 297 9.2 Beamforming in COAs 301 9.3 Stability Optimization of the Coupled-Oscillator Steady-State Solution 308 9.4 Multi-Beam Pattern Generation Using Coupled-Oscillator Arrays 311 9.5 Control of the Amplitude Dynamics 315 9.6 Adaptive Coupled-Oscillator Array Beamformer 317 9.7 Conclusion 320 Chapter 10 Overall Conclusions and Possible Future Directions 321 REFERENCES 325 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 341 INDEX 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisA unique, practical approach to the design of high-speed digital circuit boards The demand for ever-faster digital circuit designs is beginning to render the circuit theory used by engineers ineffective. Digital Circuit Boards presents an alternative to the circuit theory approach, emphasizing energy flow rather than just signal interconnection to explain logic circuit behavior. The book shows how treating design in terms of transmission lines will ensure that the logic will function, addressing both storage and movement of electrical energy on these lines. It covers transmission lines in all forms to illustrate how trace geometry defines where the signals can travel, then goes on to examine transmission lines as energy sources, the true nature of decoupling, types of resonances, ground bounce, cross talk, and more. Providing designers with the tools they need to lay out digital circuit boards for fast logic and to get designs working the first timTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 BASICS 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Why the Field Approach is Important 3 1.3 The Role of Circuit Analysis 4 1.4 Getting Started 5 1.5 Voltage and the Electric Field 6 1.6 Current 7 1.7 Capacitance 8 1.8 Mutual and Self-Capacitance 10 1.9 E Fields Inside Conductors 11 1.10 The D Field 12 1.11 Energy Storage in a Capacitor 12 1.12 The Energy Stored in an Electric Field 13 1.13 The Magnetic Field 13 1.14 Rise Time/Fall Time 15 1.15 Moving Energy into Components 15 1.16 Faraday's Law 16 1.17 Self- and Mutual Inductance 16 1.18 Poynting’s Vector 17 1.19 Fields at DC 18 2 TRANSMISSION LINES 22 2.1 Introduction 22 2.2 Some Common Assumptions 24 2.3 Transmission Line Types 25 2.4 Characteristic Impedance 27 2.5 Wave Velocity 29 2.6 Step Waves on a Properly Terminated Line 30 2.7 The Open Circuited Transmission Line 31 2.8 The Short Circuited Transmission Line 33 2.9 Waves that Transition between Lines with Different Characteristic Impedances 35 2.10 Nonlinear Terminations 38 2.11 Discharging a Charged Open Transmission Line 38 2.12 Ground/Power Planes 40 2.13 The Ground and Power Planes as a Tapered Transmission Line 41 2.14 Pulling Energy from a Tapered Transmission Line (TTL) 43 2.15 The Energy Flow Through Cascaded (Series) Transmission Lines 45 2.16 An Analysis of Cascaded Transmission Lines 48 2.17 Series (Source) Terminating a Transmission Line 49 2.18 Parallel (Shunt) Terminations 50 2.19 Stubs 52 2.20 Decoupling Capacitor as a Stub 54 2.21 Transmission Line Networks 54 2.22 The Network Program 55 2.23 Measuring Characteristic Impedance 56 3 RADIATION AND INTERFERENCE COUPLING 61 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 The Nature of Fields in Logic Structures 62 3.3 Classical Radiation 62 3.4 Radiation from Step Function Waves 63 3.5 Common Mode and Normal Mode 66 3.6 The Radiation Pattern along a Transmission Line 70 3.7 Notes on Radiation 70 3.8 The Cross Coupling Process (Cross Talk) 71 3.9 Magnetic Component of Cross Coupling 72 3.10 Capacitive Component of Cross Coupling 74 3.11 Cross Coupling Continued 75 3.12 Cross Coupling between Parallel Transmission Lines of Equal Length 76 3.13 Radiation from Board Edges 78 3.14 Ground Bounce 79 3.15 Susceptibility 80 4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT 82 4.1 Introduction 82 4.2 The Power Time Constant 84 4.3 Capacitors 86 4.4 The Four-Terminal Capacitor or DTL 87 4.5 Types of DTLs 89 4.6 Circuit Board Resonances 90 4.7 Decoupling Capacitors 90 4.8 The Board Decoupling Problem 92 4.9 The IC Decoupling Problem 93 4.10 Comments on Energy Management 94 4.11 Skin Effect 95 4.12 Dielectric Losses 97 4.13 Split Ground/Power Planes 97 4.14 The Analog/digital Interface Problem 98 4.15 Power Dissipation 99 4.16 Traces through Conducting Planes 100 4.17 Trace Geometries that Reduce Termination Resistor Counts 101 4.18 The Control of Connecting Spaces 101 4.19 Another way to look at Energy Flow in Transmission Lines 103 5 SIGNAL INTEGRITY ENGINEERING 106 5.1 Introduction 106 5.2 The Envelope of Permitted Logic Levels 107 5.3 Net Lists 108 5.4 Noise Budgets 108 5.5 Logic Level Variation 109 5.6 Logic and Voltage Drops 110 5.7 Measuring the Performance of a Net 111 5.8 The Decoupling Capacitor 112 5.9 Cross Coupling Problems 114 5.10 Characteristic Impedance and the Error Budget 114 5.11 Resistor Networks 116 5.12 Ferrite Beads 117 5.13 Grounding in Facilities: A Brief Review 118 5.14 Grounding as Applied to Electronic Hardware 120 5.15 Internal Grounding of a Digital Circuit Board 123 5.16 Power Line Interference 124 5.17 Electrostatic Discharge 125 6 CIRCUIT BOARDS 130 6.1 Introduction 130 6.2 More about Characteristic Impedance 131 6.3 Microstrip 133 6.4 Centered Stripline 135 6.5 Embedded Microstrip 136 6.6 Asymmetric Stripline 137 6.7 Two-Layer Boards 140 6.8 Four-Layer Circuit Board 143 6.9 Six-Layer Boards 145 Glossary 147 Abbreviations and Acronyms 149 Bibliography 157 Index 159

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive picture of today's energy world, describes the potential for energy savings that can be achieved, and analyzes the technology developments which will lead to a 100% renewable energy-powered world The world is at the crossroads of either quickly changing the energy picture towards implementing efficient renewable energy sources or postponing this process by another generation. Based on the author's more than 30 years' industrial experience, this book gives a set of assumptions by extrapolating known technology developments and shows that 100% coverage by renewable technology of global energy needs is much more probable than previously argued. Basic facts using rule of thumb and order-of-magnitude considerations underpin the author's argument. The book shows how energy efficiency technologies will be able to drastically reduce the energy consumption for the same quality of life. The most relevant renewable energy technologies are discussedTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgements xxiii List of Abbreviations xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Changing World 1 1.2 Why Another Book on 100% Renewables? 3 2 Analysis of Today’s Energy Situation 7 2.1 Basic Energy Terms 7 2.2 Global Energy Situation 11 2.3 Energy Sectors 13 2.4 Challenges for Fossil Fuels 16 2.5 Problems with Nuclear Energy 29 3 The Importance of Energy Efficiency Measures 33 3.1 Traditional Extrapolation of Future Energy Demands or Alternatively “The Same or with Renewables Even Better Quality of Life with Much Less Energy” 33 3.2 Decrease in End Energy Needs with a “Better Quality of Life” 35 3.3 Today’s Energy Needs with Known Energy Efficiency Measures 41 3.4 Support Mechanisms to Facilitate New Products: Ban The Old or Facilitate The New Ones 42 4 Overview of the Most Important Renewable Energy Technologies 45 4.1 Basics About the Potential of Various Renewable Technologies 45 4.2 Wind Energy 48 4.3 Solar Thermal Collectors and Concentrators 57 4.4 Bioenergy: Biomass and Fuel 66 4.5 Photovoltaics 68 4.6 Other Renewable Technologies 70 5 PV Market Development 77 5.1 Strategic and Consumer Goods in Society and Why Strategic Ones Need Initial Support 77 5.2 PV Applications and History 84 5.3 Historical PV Market Development 88 5.4 Feed-in Tariffs - Sustainable Versus Boom and Bust Market Growth 93 5.5 PV Market Development Towards 2020 101 5.6 Total Budget for Feed-in Tariff Support as Positive Investment for National Economies and Merit Order Effects for Electricity Customers 106 5.7 New Electricity Market Design for Increasing Numbers of Variable Renewable Energy Systems 110 5.8 Developments for the Future Energy Infrastructure 111 6 PV Value Chain and Technology 117 6.1 Basics of Solar Radiation and Conversion in PV Cells 117 6.2 Value Chain for Crystalline Silicon PV Systems 122 6.3 Value Chain for Thin-Film Technologies 134 6.4 Concentrated PV (CPV) and III?V Compound Solar Cells 137 6.5 New Technologies (Dye, OPV, and Novel Concepts) 138 6.6 Other Cost Components for PV Systems 141 6.7 Marimekko Plot for PV Systems and Summary Chart for Cell Efficiencies 142 7 The Astonishing Predictive Power of Price Experience Curves 147 7.1 Basics about Price Experience Curves 147 7.2 Relevant Price Experience Curves Comparable to PV 148 7.3 Lesson Learned from PECs Discussed 151 7.4 Price Experience Curve for PV Modules 152 7.5 Price Experience Curve for DC/AC inverters 159 7.6 Price Experience Curve for Wind Energy and Other Relevant Products for a 100% Renewable World 161 8 Future Technology Development 163 8.1 General Remarks on Future Technology Developments 163 8.2 Photovoltaics 164 8.3 Wind Energy 170 8.4 Solar Thermal 171 8.5 Other Renewables 171 8.6 Other System Components 171 8.7 Importance of the Renewable Energy Portfolio - in Particular Solar and Wind 175 9 Future Energy Projections - The 150 Peta-Watt-hour Challenge 179 9.1 Historical Development 179 9.2 Some Future Projections and Scenarios by Others 180 9.3 Global Energy Scenarios and Market Development of the Major Renewables from the Author’s Point of View 186 10 Likelihood of and Timeline for a World Powered by 100% Renewable Energy 203 10.1 Likelihood of a 100% Renewable World 203 10.2 Global Network or Local Autonomy? 205 10.3 Timeline for a 100% Renewable World 209 11 Conclusion: The 100% Renewable Energy Puzzle 213 References 219 Index 225

Read more less

Book SynopsisShows readers how to gain the competitive edge in the integrated circuit marketplace This book offers a wholly unique perspective on the digital design kit. It points to hidden value in the safety margins of standard-cell libraries and shows design engineers and managers how to use this knowledge to beat the competition. Engineering the CMOS Library reveals step by step how the generic, foundry-provided standard-cell library is built, and how to extract value from existing std-cells and EDA tools in order to produce tighter-margined, smaller, faster, less power-hungry, and more yield-producing integrated circuits. It explores all aspects of the digital design kit, including the different views of CMOS std-cell libraries along with coverage of IO libraries, memory compilers, and small analog blocks. Readers will learn: How to work with overdesigned std-cell libraries to improve profitability while maintaining safety How functionTable of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Adding Project-Specific Functions, Drive Strengths, Views, and Corners 4 1.2 What Is a DDK? 5 2 STDCELL LIBRARIES 9 2.1 Lesson from the Real World: Manager's Perspective and Engineer's Perspective 9 2.2 What Is a Stdcell? 11 2.3 Extended Library Offerings 32 2.4 Boutique Library Offerings 36 2.5 Concepts for Further Study 37 3 IO LIBRARIES 39 3.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 39 3.2 Extension Capable Architectures versus Function Complete Architectures 40 3.3 Electrostatic Discharge Considerations 43 3.4 Concepts for Further Study 50 4 MEMORY COMPILERS 52 4.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 52 4.2 Single Ports, Dual Ports, and ROM: The Compiler 55 4.3 Nonvolatile Memories: The Block 58 4.4 Special-Purpose Memories: The Custom 60 4.5 Concepts for Further Study 62 5 OTHER FUNCTIONS 63 5.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 63 5.2 Phase-Locked Loops, Power-On Resets, and Other Small-Scale Integration Analogs 66 5.3 Low-Power Support Structures 69 5.4 Stitching Structures 71 5.5 Hard, Firm, and Soft Boxes 75 5.6 Concepts for Further Study 78 6 PHYSICAL VIEWS 80 6.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 80 6.2 Picking an Architecture 82 6.3 Measuring Density 86 6.4 The Need and the Way to Work with Fabrication Houses 89 6.5 Concepts for Further Study 92 7 SPICE 95 7.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 95 7.2 Why a Tool More Than 40 Years Old Is Still Useful 99 7.3 Accuracy, Reality, and Why SPICE Results Must be Viewed with a Wary Eye 102 7.4 Sufficient Parasitics 106 7.5 Concepts for Further Study 107 8 TIMING VIEWS 109 8.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 109 8.2 Performance Limits and Measurement 110 8.3 Default Versus Conditional Arcs 110 8.4 Break-Point Optimization 112 8.5 A Word on Setup and Hold 115 8.6 Failure Mechanisms and Roll-Off 122 8.7 Supporting Efficient Synthesis 124 8.8 Supporting Efficient Timing Closure 131 8.9 Design Corner Specific Timing Views 134 8.10 Nonlinear Timing Views are so "Old Hat" . . . 140 8.11 Concepts for Further Study 142 9 POWER VIEWS 145 9.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 145 9.2 Timing Arcs Versus Power Arcs 147 9.3 Static Power 148 9.4 Real Versus Measured Dynamic Power 150 9.5 Should Power Be Built as a Monotonic Array? 153 9.6 Best-Case and Worst-case Power Views Versus Best-Case and Worst-Case Timing Views 155 9.7 Efficiently Measuring Power 156 9.8 Concepts for Further Study 158 10 NOISE VIEWS 160 10.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 160 10.2 Noise Arcs Versus Timing and Power Arcs 162 10.3 The Easy Part 165 10.4 The Not-So-Easy Part 166 10.5 Concepts for Further Study 168 11 LOGICAL VIEWS 170 11.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 170 11.2 Consistency Across Simulators 171 11.2.1 Efficient Testing 175 11.3 Consistency with Timing, Power & Noise Views 177 11.4 Concepts for Further Study 180 12 TEST VIEWS 181 12.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 181 12.2 Supporting Reachability 184 12.3 Supporting Observability 189 12.4 Concepts for Further Study 191 13 CONSISTENCY 193 13.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 193 13.2 Validating Views across a Library 195 13.3 Validating Stdcells Across a Technology Node 199 13.4 Validating Libraries Across Multiple Technology Nodes 204 13.5 Concepts for Further Study 208 14 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURABILITY 209 14.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 209 14.2 What is DFM? 211 14.3 Concepts for Further Study 224 15 VALIDATION 226 15.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 226 15.2 Quality Levels 229 15.3 Concepts for Further Study 236 16 PLAYING WITH THE PHYSICAL DESIGN KIT: USUALLY "AT YOUR OWN RISK" 237 16.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 237 16.2 Manipulating Models 240 16.3 Added Unsupported Devices 243 16.4 Concepts for Further Study 245 17 TAGGING AND REVISIONING 247 17.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 247 17.2 Tagging and Time Stamps 248 17.3 Metadata, Directory Structures, and Pointers 254 17.4 Concepts for Further Study 258 18 RELEASING AND SUPPORTING 260 18.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 260 18.2 When Is Test Silicon Needed for Verification? 263 18.3 Sending the Baby Out the Door 265 18.4 Multiple Quality Levels on the Same Design 269 18.5 Supporting "Bug Fixes" 271 18.6 Concepts for Further Study 274 19 OTHER TOPICS 276 19.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 276 19.2 Supporting High-Speed Design 279 19.3 Supporting Low-Power Design 283 19.4 Supporting Third-Party Libraries 286 19.5 Supporting Black Box Third-Party IP (Intellectual Property) Design 289 19.6 Supporting Multiple Library Design 292 19.7 Concepts for Further Study 293 20 COMMUNICATIONS 295 20.1 Manager's Perspective 295 20.2 Customer's Perspective 298 20.3 Vendor's Perspective 300 20.4 Engineer's Perspective 301 20.5 Concepts for Further Study 302 20.6 Conclusions 302 APPENDIX I MINIMUM LIBRARY SYNTHESIS VERSUS FULL-LIBRARY SYNTHESIS OF A FOUR-BIT FLASH ADDER 305 APPENDIX II PERTINENT CMOS BSIM SPICE PARAMETERS WITH UNITS AND DEFAULT LEVELS 311 APPENDIX III DEFINITION OF TERMS 313 APPENDIX IV ONE POSSIBLE MEANS OF FORMALIZED MONTHLY REPORTING 317 INDEX 319

Read more less

Book SynopsisVarious systems science and engineering disciplines are covered and challenging new research issues in these disciplines are revealed. They will be extremely valuable for the readers to search for some new research directions and problems.Table of ContentsContributors xxiii Preface xxix I Systems Science are Engineering Methodologies 1 1 A Systems Framework For Sustainability 3Ali G. Hessami, Feng Hsu, are Hamid Jahankhani 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 A Unified Systems Sustainability Concept 5 1.3 Sustainability Assurance: the Framework 6 1.3.1 Weighted Factors Analysis 6 1.3.2 the Framework 7 1.3.3 the Macro Concept of a Sustainable Architecture (G4.1) 10 1.3.4 the Micro Concept of a Sustainable System 11 1.3.5 A Top-Down Hierarchy of a Multi-Level Sustainability Concept 12 1.4 Technological Sustainability Case Study—Information Systems Security 13 1.4.1 Network Security as a Business Issue 14 1.4.2 the Focus of Investment on Network Security 15 1.5 Conclusions 17 References 18 2 System of Systems Thinking In Policy Development: Challenges are Opportunities 21Keith W. Hipel, Liping Fang, are Michele Bristow 2.1 Introduction 21 2.1.1 A World in Crisis 21 2.1.2 System of Systems 23 2.2 Value Systems are Ethics 26 2.2.1 Conflicting Value Systems 27 2.2.2 Modeling Value Systems 28 2.3 Complex Adaptive Systems 32 2.3.1 Emergent Behavior 32 2.3.2 Modeling Complex Systems 34 2.4 Risk, Uncertainty, are Unpredictability 37 2.4.1 Risk Management 37 2.4.2 Modeling Risk are Adaptation Processes 40 2.5 System of Systems Modeling are Policy Development 42 2.5.1 Global Food System Model 43 2.5.2 Policy Implications 51 2.6 Conclusions 58 References 59 3 Systemic Yoyos: An Intuition are Playground For General Systems Research 71Yi Lin, Yi Dongyun, are Zaiwu Gong 3.1 Introduction 71 3.1.1 the Concept of General Systems 72 3.1.2 A Look at the Success of Calculus-Based Theories 75 3.1.3 Whole Evolution are Yoyo Fields 78 3.2 Theoretical are Empirical Justifications 81 3.2.1 Transitional Changes in Whole Evolutions 81 3.2.2 Quantitative Infinity are Equal Quantitative Effects 83 3.2.3 Fluid Circulation, Informational Infrastructure, are Human Communications 86 3.3 Elementary Properties of Yoyo Fields 91 3.3.1 Eddy are Meridian Fields 91 3.3.2 Interactions Between Systemic Yoyos 94 3.3.3 Laws on State of Motion 98 3.4 Applications in Social Sciences 102 3.4.1 Systemic Structures of Civilizations 102 3.4.2 Systemic Structures Beneath Business Organizations 108 3.4.3 Systemic Structure in Human Mind 109 3.5 Applications in Economics 113 3.5.1 Becker’s Rotten Kid Theorem 113 3.5.2 Interindustry Wage Differentials 117 3.5.3 Price Behaviors of Projects 122 3.6 Applications in the Foundations of Mathematics 127 3.6.1 Historical Crises in the Foundations of Mathematics 128 3.6.2 Actual are Potential Infinities 131 3.6.3 Vase Puzzle are the Fourth Crisis 132 3.7 Applications in Extreme Weather Forecast 137 3.7.1 V-3𝜃 Graphs: A Structural Prediction Method 137 3.7.2 Digitization of Irregular Information 140 3.8 Conclusions 143 References 146 4 Grey System: Thinking, Methods, are Models With Applications 153Sifeng Liu, Jeffrey Y.L. Forrest, are Yingjie Yang 4.1 Introduction 153 4.1.1 Inception are Growth of Grey System Theory 153 4.1.2 Basics of Grey System 155 4.2 Sequence Operators 157 4.2.1 Buffer Operators 158 4.2.2 Generation of Grey Sequences 160 4.2.3 Exponentiality of Accumulating Generations 162 4.3 Grey Incidence Analysis 163 4.3.1 Grey Incidence Factors are Set of Grey Incidence Operators 163 4.3.2 Degrees of Grey Incidences 164 4.3.3 General Grey Incidence Models 165 4.3.4 Grey Incidence Models Based on Similarity and Nearness 167 4.4 Grey Cluster Evaluation Models 168 4.4.1 Grey Incidence Clustering 169 4.4.2 Grey Variable Weight Clustering 169 4.4.3 Grey Fixed Weight Clustering 171 4.4.4 Grey Evaluation Using Triangular Whitenization Functions 172 4.4.5 Practical Applications 175 4.5 Grey Prediction Models 176 4.5.1 GM(1,1) Model 176 4.5.2 Improvements on GM(1,1) Models 177 4.5.3 Applicable Ranges of GM(1,1) Models 180 4.5.4 Discrete Grey Models 180 4.5.5 GM(r,h) Models 182 4.5.6 Grey System Predictions 188 4.6 Grey Models for Decision-Making 193 4.6.1 Grey Target Decisions 193 4.6.2 Multi-Attribute Intelligent Grey Target Decision Models 201 4.7 Practical Applications 202 4.7.1 To Analyze the Time Difference of Economic Indices 202 4.7.2 the Evaluation of Science are Technology Park 206 4.7.3 To Select the Supplier of Key Components of Large Commercial Aircrafts 209 4.8 Introduction to the Software of Grey System Modeling 211 4.8.1 Features are Functions 211 4.8.2 Operation Guide 213 Acknowledgments 220 References 222 5 Building Resilience: Naval Expeditionary Command are Control 225Christopher Nemeth, Thomas Miller, Michael Polidoro, and C. Matthew O’Connor 5.1 Introduction 225 5.2 Expeditionary Operations Command are Control 226 5.2.1 Systems Acquisition 227 5.3 Human-Centered System Development 228 5.3.1 Envisioned World Problem 229 5.3.2 Cognitive Systems Engineering 229 5.3.3 Application: Navy Expeditionary Combat Command 230 5.3.4 Reasonable Scientific Criteria 231 5.4 Discussion 232 5.4.1 Resilience Engineering 232 5.4.2 the Data Hub 234 5.4.3 Implementation Challenges 234 5.4.4 Limitations 234 5.5 Future Work 236 5.5.1 Human Performance Research 236 5.5.2 Transition from Qualitative Research to Design 236 5.5.3 Resilience Engineering 236 5.6 Conclusions 237 Acknowledgments 237 References 237 II Learning are Control 241 6 Advances are Challenges On Intelligent Learning In Control Systems 243Ching-Chih Tsai, Kao-Shing Hwang, Alan Liu, are Chia-Feng Juang 6.1 Introduction 243 6.2 Reinforcement Learning 245 6.2.1 Reinforcement Learning 245 6.2.2 Q-Learning Algorithm 247 6.2.3 Reinforcement Learning in Robots 249 6.2.4 Soccer Robot Behaviors 250 6.2.5 Concluding Remarks 251 6.3 Bio-Inspired Evolutionary Learning Control 252 6.3.1 Bio-Inspired Evolutionary Learning Control 252 6.3.2 Bio-Inspired Evolutionary Robots 253 6.4 Intelligent Learning Control Using Fuzzy Neural Networks 254 6.4.1 Introduction 254 6.4.2 Intelligent Learning Control Using FNNs 255 6.5 Case-Based Reasoning are Learning 257 6.5.1 Case-Based Reasoning Process 257 6.5.2 Case Design are Reuse 257 6.5.3 Hybrid Learning Method Architectures in CBR 258 6.5.4 Applications in Human–Robot Interaction 259 6.6 Conclusions 260 References 261 7 Adaptive Classifiers For Nonstationary Environments 265Cesare Alippi, Giacomo Boracchi, Manuel Roveri, Gregory Ditzler, and Robi Polikar 7.1 Introduction 265 7.2 Definition of the Problem 266 7.3 Learning Concept Drifts 268 7.4 Change Detection 272 7.4.1 Change-Detection Tests: A Review 273 7.4.2 Change-Detection Tests in Adaptive Classifiers 276 7.5 Assessing the Performance: Figures of Merit 278 7.5.1 Raw Classification Accuracy 279 7.5.2 Confusion Matrix 279 7.5.3 Geometric Mean 280 7.5.4 Precision are Recall 280 7.5.5 F-measure 281 7.5.6 Receiver Operator Characteristic Curve are Area Under the Curve 281 7.6 Conclusions 282 References 283 8 Modeling, Analysis, Scheduling, are Control of Cluster Tools In Semiconductor Fabrication 289Nai Qi Wu, Mengchu Zhou, Feng Chu, are Sa¨ıd Mammar 8.1 Introduction 289 8.2 Cluster Tools are Their Operations 290 8.2.1 Architecture of Cluster Tools 290 8.2.2 Wafer Flow Patterns 291 8.2.3 Operation Requirements 294 8.3 Modeling are Performance Evaluation 295 8.3.1 Analysis Based on Timing Diagram Model 295 8.3.2 Analysis Based on Marked Graph 296 8.3.3 Analysis Based on Resource-Oriented Petri Nets 299 8.3.4 Discussion 302 8.4 Single Cluster Tool Scheduling 302 8.4.1 Scheduling with Wafer Residency Time Constraints 302 8.4.2 Scheduling with Both Wafer Residency Constraints and Activity Time Variation 305 8.4.3 Scheduling with Wafer Revisiting 306 8.4.4 Schedule Implementation 307 8.4.5 Discussion 307 8.5 Scheduling of Multi-cluster Tools 308 8.5.1 Deadlock Control are Scheduling of Track Systems 308 8.5.2 Schedule Optimization 309 8.5.3 Discussion 311 8.6 Conclusions 311 References 311 9 Design, Simulation, are Dynamic Control Of Large-Scale Manufacturing Process With Different Forms of Uncertainties 317Hyunsoo Lee are Amarnath Banerjee 9.1 Introduction 317 9.1.1 Issues in Design of Large-Scale Manufacturing Processes 318 9.1.2 Simulation Model for Dynamic Control 320 9.2 Background are Literature Review 322 9.3 Different Types of Uncertainties are FCPN-std 327 9.3.1 Definition of FCPN-std 327 9.3.2 Modular Design are Five-Stage Modeling Methodology 329 9.3.3 Simulation Using FCPN-std 332 9.4 Design of Large-Scale Manufacturing Processes 333 9.5 Dynamic Control of Manufacturing Processes 335 9.6 Conclusions 339 References 340 10 Model Identification are Synthesis of Discrete-Event Systems 343Maria Paola Cabasino, Philippe Darondeau, Maria Pia Fanti, and Carla Seatzu 10.1 Introduction 343 10.2 Background on Finite State Automata are Petri Nets 344 10.2.1 Finite State Automata 344 10.2.2 Petri Nets 346 10.3 Identification are Synthesis of Languages are Finite State Automata 347 10.4 Identification are Synthesis of Petri Nets 349 10.4.1 Synthesis from Graphs 350 10.4.2 Identification are Synthesis from Finite Languages Over T 352 10.4.3 Identification are Synthesis from Finite Languages Over E 355 10.4.4 Related Problems in the PN Framework 360 10.5 Process Mining are Workflow Problems 361 10.6 Conclusions 363 References 363 III Human–Machine Systems Design 367 11 Advances are Challenges In Intelligent Adaptive Interface Design 369Ming Hou, Haibin Zhu, Mengchu Zhou, are Robert Arrabito 11.1 Introduction 369 11.2 Evolution of Interface Technologies are IAI Concept 372 11.2.1 Evolution of Interface Technologies 373 11.2.2 A Conceptual Framework of IAI Systems 377 11.3 Challenges of IAI Design, Alternative Solutions, are Empirical Investigations 381 11.3.1 Challenges of IAI Design 381 11.3.2 User-Centered Design Approach 382 11.3.3 Agent-Based Interface Design Approaches 383 11.3.4 Analytical Methodologies 385 11.3.5 Empirical Investigations 387 11.4 Multiagent-Based Design are Operator–Agent Interaction 389 11.4.1 AIA Concept 389 11.4.2 Operator–Agent Interaction Model 391 11.4.3 Difference Between Human–Human Interaction, Human–Machine Interaction, are Operator–Agent Interaction 393 11.4.4 Optimization of Operator–Agent Interaction 396 11.5 A Generic IAI System Architecture are AIA Components 397 11.5.1 Generic IAI System Architecture 397 11.5.2 AIA Structure 402 11.5.3 Adaptation Processes 403 11.6 An IAI are AIA Design: Case Study 405 11.6.1 Interface Design Requirements for the Control of Multiple UAVs 406 11.6.2 Issues 407 11.6.3 How the IAI Design Method Was Used 407 11.6.4 Task Network Modeling are Simulation 409 11.6.5 AIA Implementation 411 11.6.6 Human-in-the-Loop Experimentation 413 11.6.7 AIA Evaluation 413 11.6.8 Discussions are Implications 413 11.7 Conclusions 415 Acknowledgments 417 References 417 12 A Complex Adaptive System of Systems Approach to Human–Automation Interaction In Smart Grid 425Alireza Fereidunian, Hamid Lesani, Mohammad Ali Zamani, Mohamad Amin Sharifi Kolarijani, Negar Hassanpour, are Sina Sharif Mansouri 12.1 Introduction 425 12.2 Complexity in Systems Science are Engineering 426 12.2.1 the Nature of Complexity 426 12.2.2 Complex Systems 429 12.2.3 Complexity Measures 431 12.2.4 Complexity-Related Terms in Literature 433 12.3 Complex Adaptive Systems 436 12.3.1 What are Complex Adaptive Systems? 436 12.3.2 Characteristics of Complex Adaptive Systems 437 12.4 System of Systems 442 12.4.1 Necessity are Definition 442 12.4.2 Characteristics of System of Systems 444 12.4.3 System of Systems Types 448 12.4.4 A Taxonomy of Systems Family 448 12.5 Complex Adaptive System of Systems 453 12.6 Human–Automation Interaction 454 12.6.1 Automation 454 12.6.2 HAI: Where Humans Interact with Automation 455 12.6.3 HAI are Function Allocation 456 12.6.4 Evolution of HAI Models: Dimensions 457 12.6.5 Evolution of HAI Models: Dynamism 458 12.6.6 Adaptive Autonomy Implementation 460 12.7 HAI in Smart Grid as a Casos 462 12.7.1 Smart Grid 462 12.7.2 HAI in Smart Grid as a CAS 465 12.7.3 HAI in Smart Grid as an SoS 467 12.8 Petri Nets for Complex Systems Modeling 467 12.8.1 Definition 468 12.8.2 Graph Representation of Petri Nets 468 12.8.3 Transition Firing 469 12.8.4 Reachability 470 12.8.5 Incidence Matrix are State Equation 470 12.8.6 Inhibitor Arc 470 12.8.7 IF–THEN Rules by Petri Net 470 12.9 Model-Based Implementation of Adaptive Autonomy 471 12.9.1 the Implementation Framework 471 12.9.2 Case Study: Adaptive Autonomy in Smart Grid 472 12.10 Adaptive Autonomy Realization Using Petri Nets 473 12.10.1 Implementation Methodology 473 12.10.2 Realization of AAHPNES 475 12.10.3 Results are Discussions 482 12.11 Conclusions 483 Acknowledgments 485 References 485 13 Virtual Training For Procedural Skills Development: Case Studies are Lessons Learnt 501Dawei Jia, Asim Bhatti, are Saeid Nahavandi 13.1 Introduction 501 13.2 Related Work 502 13.2.1 Background 502 13.2.2 Human Side of VT System Efficacy—Issues and Concerns 503 13.3 Present Study 505 13.3.1 Motivation are Aims 505 13.3.2 System Architecture are Human–Machine Interface 506 13.3.3 Measures 508 13.4 Case Study 1 509 13.4.1 Method 509 13.4.2 Results 511 13.4.3 Discussion 515 13.5 Case Study 2 516 13.5.1 Method 516 13.5.2 Results 519 13.5.3 Discussion 524 13.6 Lessons Learnt are Future Work 527 13.6.1 Training Design are Method 527 13.6.2 Measurement Methods 528 13.6.3 Prior Experience with a Force-Reflective Haptic Interface 530 13.6.4 Future Work 531 13.7 Conclusions 531 References 532 14 Computer Supported Collaborative Design: Technologies, Systems, are Applications 537Weiming Shen, Jean-Paul Barthés, are Junzhou Luo 14.1 Introduction 537 14.2 History of Computer Supported Collaborative Design 538 14.2.1 CSCD 538 14.2.2 CSCD Eve: 1980s 539 14.2.3 CSCD Emergence: 1990s 541 14.2.4 CSCD: Today 542 14.3 Methods, Techniques, are Technologies 542 14.3.1 Communication, Coordination, are Cooperation 542 14.3.2 Negotiation are Conflict Resolution 546 14.3.3 Ontology are Semantic Integration 548 14.3.4 Personal Assistance are Human–Machine Interaction 548 14.3.5 Collaborative Workflows 550 14.3.6 Collaborative Virtual Workspaces are Environments 552 14.3.7 New Representation Schemes for Collaborative Design 552 14.3.8 New Visualization Systems for Collaborative Design 553 14.3.9 Product Data Management are Product Lifecycle Management Systems 553 14.3.10 Security are Privacy 554 14.4 Collaborative Design Systems 555 14.4.1 System Architectures 555 14.4.2 Web-Based/Centralized Systems 557 14.4.3 Agent-Based/Distributed Systems 558 14.4.4 Service-Oriented Systems 558 14.4.5 Collaborative Design Over Supply Chain (Virtual Enterprise) 559 14.5 Applications 560 14.6 Research Challenges are Opportunities 561 14.7 Conclusions 564 References 564 15 Support Collaboration With Roles 575Haibin Zhu, Mengchu Zhou, are Ming Hou 15.1 Introduction 575 15.2 Benefits of Roles in Collaboration 577 15.2.1 Establishing Trust in Collaboration 577 15.2.2 Establishing Dynamics 578 15.2.3 Facilitating Interaction 580 15.2.4 Support Adaptation 582 15.2.5 Information Sharing 583 15.2.6 Other Benefits 585 15.3 Role-Based Collaboration 585 15.4 E-Cargo Model 590 15.5 A Case Study with RBC are E-Cargo 592 15.6 Conclusions 595 References 595 IV Cloud are Service-Oriented Computing 599 16 Control-Based Approaches to Dynamic Resource Management In Cloud Computing 601Pengcheng Xiong, Calton Pu, Zhikui Wang, are Gueyoung Jung 16.1 Introduction 601 16.1.1 Public Cloud Computing 602 16.1.2 Dynamic Resource Management: Control-Based Approaches 602 16.2 Experimental Setup are Application Models 603 16.2.1 Test Bed are Control Architecture for a Multi-Tier Application 604 16.2.2 System Models for the Application: Open or Closed 606 16.3 Dynamic Resource Allocation Through Utilization Control 607 16.3.1 Design of Experiments 607 16.3.2 Performance of the Application Under Control 608 16.4 Performance Guarantee Through Dynamic Resource Allocation 612 16.5 Conclusions 614 References 615 17 A Petri Net Solution to Protocol-Level Mismatches In Service Composition 619Pengcheng Xiong, Mengchu Zhou, Calton Pu, are Yushun Fan 17.1 Introduction 619 17.1.1 Interface Mismatches 621 17.1.2 Protocol-Level Mismatches 622 17.2 Modeling Service Interaction with Petri Nets 624 17.2.1 Basic Petri Nets 624 17.2.2 Model Web Service Interaction with C-Net 627 17.3 Protocol-Level Mismatch Analysis 630 17.3.1 Protocol-Level Mismatch Detection 630 17.3.2 Core Algorithm 632 17.3.3 Comprehensive Solution to Protocol-Level Mismatch 634 17.4 Illustrating Examples 636 17.5 Conclusions 638 References 641 18 Service-Oriented Workflow Systems 645Wei Tan are Mengchu Zhou 18.1 Introduction 645 18.2 Workflow in SOC: State of the Art 647 18.2.1 Languages for Service Composition 647 18.2.2 Automatic Service Composition 649 18.2.3 Mediation-Aided Service Composition 649 18.2.4 Verification of Service Workflows 650 18.2.5 Decentralized Execution of Workflows 651 18.3 Open Issues 652 18.3.1 Social Network Meets Service Computing 652 18.3.2 More Practical are Flexible Service Composition 652 18.3.3 Workflow as a Service 653 18.3.4 Novel Applications 654 18.4 Conclusions 656 References 657 V Sensing, Networking, are Optimization In Robotics are Manufacturing 661 19 Rehabilitation Robotic Prostheses For Upper Extremity 663Han-Pang Huang, Yi-Hung Liu, Wei-Chen Lee, Jiun-Yih Kuan, and Tzu-Hao Huang 19.1 Introduction 663 19.2 Rehabilitation Robot Arm are Control 664 19.2.1 Mechanism Design 666 19.2.2 Dynamic Model of an Individual Joint 669 19.2.3 LTR-Observer-Based Individual Joint Dynamic Sliding Mode Control with Gravity Compensation 671 19.2.4 Simulation of the NTU Rehabilitation Robot Arm II 676 19.2.5 Experimental Results for the NTU Rehabilitation Robot Arm II 677 19.3 Rehabilitation Robot Hand 678 19.4 Stability of Neuroprosthesis 683 19.4.1 SVDD-Based Target EMG Pattern Estimation 685 19.4.2 Nontarget EMG Pattern Filtering Scheme 686 19.4.3 Illustrative Example 688 19.5 Conclusions 691 References 692 20 Accelerometer-Based Body Sensor Network (Bsn) For Medical Diagnosis Assessment are Training 699Ming-Yih Lee, Kin Fong Lei, Wen-Yen Lin, Wann-Yun Shieh, Wen-Wei Tsai, Simon H. Fu, are Chung-Hsien Kuo 20.1 Introduction 699 20.2 Body Sensor Network 700 20.3 Information Retrieved from Accelerometer 702 20.4 Recent Advances in Accelerometer-Based BSN 703 20.4.1 Tilting Angle Identification 703 20.4.2 Muscle Strength Identification 706 20.4.3 Gait Performance Identification 708 20.5 Applications of Accelerometer-Based BSN for Rehabilitation 711 20.5.1 Human Stability Evaluation System 711 20.5.2 Postural Stability Evaluation for Stroke Patients 712 20.5.3 Postural Stability Training for Stroke Patients 713 20.6 BSN Simulation System 715 20.7 Conclusions 718 References 719 21 Telepresence Robots For Medical are Homecare Applications 725Jun-Ming Lu are Yeh-Liang Hsu 21.1 Introduction 725 21.2 Surgery, Diagnosis, are Consultation 727 21.3 Rehabilitation are Therapy 728 21.4 Monitoring are Assistance 728 21.5 Communication 729 21.6 Key Factors Contributing to the Success of Telepresence Robots 729 21.6.1 Robot Factors of Acceptance 729 21.6.2 Human Factors of Acceptance 731 21.6.3 Summary 732 21.7 Conclusions 732 References 732 22 Advances In Climbing Robots 737Jizhong Xiao are Hongguang Wang 22.1 Introduction 737 22.2 Technologies for Adhering to Surfaces 738 22.2.1 Magnetic Adhesion 739 22.2.2 Vacuum Suction Techniques 740 22.2.3 Aerodynamic Attraction 744 22.2.4 Grasping Grippers 748 22.2.5 Bio-Mimetic Approaches Inspired by Climbing Animals 749 22.2.6 Emerging Technologies for Climbing Robots 753 22.3 Locomotion Techniques of Climbing Robots 755 22.4 Conclusions 759 Acknowledgment 760 References 760 23 Data Processing In Current 3D Robotic Perception Systems 767Cang YE 23.1 Introduction 767 23.1.1 Stereovision 767 23.1.2 LIDAR 769 23.1.3 Flash LIDAR Camera (FLC) 770 23.2 An LIDAR-Based Terrain Mapping are Navigation System 771 23.2.1 Overview of the Mapping are Navigation System 772 23.2.2 Terrain Mapping 773 23.2.3 Terrain Traversability Analysis 776 23.2.4 PTI Histogram for Path Planning 777 23.2.5 Experimental Results 779 23.3 FLC-Based Systems 781 23.3.1 VR-Odometry 782 23.3.2 Three-Dimensional Data Segmentation 787 23.4 Conclusions 791 Acknowledgments 792 References 792 24 Hybrid/Electric Vehicle Battery Manufacturing: The State-Of-The-Art 795Claudia P. Arenas Guerrero, Feng Ju, Jingshan Li, Guoxian Xiao, and Stephan Biller 24.1 Introduction 795 24.2 Vehicle Battery Requirements 796 24.3 Hybrid, Plug-In Hybrid, are Electric Vehicle 797 24.3.1 Hybrid Electric Vehicle 797 24.3.2 Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle 797 24.3.3 Electric Vehicle 798 24.4 Battery Technology Development 798 24.5 Nickel-Metal Hydride Battery 799 24.5.1 NiMH Battery Manufacturing 800 24.5.2 NiMH Batteries in Commercial Vehicles 800 24.5.3 Cost 801 24.5.4 Recycling 801 24.6 Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) Battery 802 24.6.1 Lithium Technology 802 24.6.2 Manufacturing Processes 803 24.6.3 Li-Ion Batteries in Commercial Vehicles 807 24.6.4 Safety 808 24.6.5 Cost 809 24.6.6 Environmental Issues 809 24.6.7 Recycling 809 24.7 Challenges 810 24.8 Conclusions 812 References 812 25 Recent Advances are Issues In Facility Location Problems 817Feng Chu, Zhanguo Zhu, are Saïıd Mammar 25.1 Introduction 817 25.2 A Capacitated Plant Location Problem with Multicommodity Flow 819 25.2.1 Problem Description 819 25.2.2 Problem Formulation 819 25.3 A Multitype Transshipment Point Location Problem with Multicommodity Flow 821 25.3.1 Problem Description 821 25.3.2 Problem Formulation 822 25.4 A Large Scale New Variant of Capacitated Clustering Problem 824 25.4.1 Problem Description 824 25.4.2 Problem Formulation 825 25.5 A Location Problem with Selective Matching are Vehicles Assignment 826 25.5.1 Problem Description 826 25.5.2 Problem Formulation 826 25.6 Competitive Facility Location are Design with Reactions of Competitors Already in the Market 828 25.6.1 Problem Description 829 25.6.2 Problem Formulation 829 25.7 Conclusions are Future Research Directions 831 References 832 Index 835

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical overview of CMOS circuit design, this book covers the technology, analysis, and design techniques of voltage reference circuits. The design requirements covered follow modern CMOS processes, with an emphasis on low power, low voltage, and low temperature coefficient voltage reference design.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii Nomenclature xv 1 Warm Up 1 1.1 Bipolar Junction Transistors 2 1.1.1 Differential VBE 5 1.2 Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistor 7 1.2.1 Cutoff Region 11 1.2.2 Subthreshold Conduction 11 1.2.3 Triode Region 14 1.2.4 Saturation Region 16 1.2.5 Thermal Properties 19 1.2.6 Channel Length Modulation Effect 23 1.3 Diode 23 1.4 Resistor 25 1.4.1 Dummy Element 27 1.4.2 Guard Ring 27 1.4.3 Sheet Resistance 27 1.5 Device Matching 28 1.5.1 Application of Statistics to Circuit Design 28 1.5.2 Systematic Variation 30 1.6 Simulation Models for Circuit Design 31 1.6.1 Process Variation and Typical Design 32 1.6.2 Process Corners 34 1.7 Noise 36 1.7.1 Types of Noises 36 1.7.2 Sums and Multiplications of Noises 38 1.8 Fabrication Technology 39 1.9 Book Organization 40 1.10 Exercises 42 References 46 2 Voltage Reference 49 2.1 Performance Measures 49 2.1.1 Line Regulation 51 2.1.2 Temperature Coefficient 54 2.1.3 Power Supply Rejection Ratio 56 2.1.4 Quiescent Current 59 2.1.5 Output Noise 60 2.2 Other Design Considerations 62 2.3 Summary 63 2.4 Exercises 65 References 70 3 Bandgap Voltage Reference 71 3.1 Widlar Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 71 3.2 Drain Voltage Equalization Current Mirror 74 3.2.1 Opamp Based β-Multiplier Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 76 3.2.2 Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 77 3.3 Major Circuit Elements 81 3.3.1 Operational Amplifier 81 3.3.2 Current Mirror 86 3.3.3 Startup Circuit 88 3.3.4 Resistor Network 93 3.3.5 Bipolar Transistor 94 3.4 Complete Layout 95 3.5 Summary 95 3.6 Exercises 96 References 101 4 Error Sources in Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 103 4.1 Non-Ideal Opamp 103 4.1.1 Input Offset Voltage 104 4.1.2 Limited Gain and Power Supply Rejection Ratio 112 4.1.3 Noise 113 4.2 Current Mirror Mismatch 114 4.2.1 Channel Length Modulation Effect Compensation 116 4.2.2 Cascode Current Mirror 117 4.3 Bipolar Transistor 122 4.3.1 Size Variation 122 4.3.2 Series Base Resistance 122 4.3.3 β Variation 125 4.4 Resistor Variation 126 4.5 Power Supply Variation 127 4.5.1 Pre-Regulation 132 4.6 Output Loading 135 4.7 Output Noise 138 4.8 Voltage Reference Circuit Trimming 140 4.8.1 Linked Fuse Resistor Trimming 141 4.8.2 Resistor Trimming Circuit Analysis 142 4.8.3 Modulated Trimming 146 4.8.4 Voltage Domain Trimming 148 4.8.5 Current Domain Trimming 149 4.9 Summary 149 4.10 Exercises 151 References 161 ADVANCED VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUITS 5 Temperature Compensation Techniques 165 5.1 VBE − DeltaVBE Compensation 166 5.1.1 Brokaw Bandgap Voltage Reference 168 5.1.2 β-Multiplier VBE − DeltaVBE Compensation 170 5.2 Widlar PTAT Current Source and VBE Compensation 175 5.3 VGS Based Temperature Compensation 177 5.3.1 VGS Current Source 178 5.4 Summary 182 5.5 Exercises 183 References 189 6 Sub-1V Voltage Reference Circuit 191 6.1 Sub-1V Output Stage 193 6.2 Voltage Headroom in Opamp based β-multiplier Voltage Reference Circuit 195 6.2.1 Opamp with NMOS Input Stage 197 6.2.2 Local Voltage Boosting 198 6.2.3 Low Vth Transistor 198 6.2.4 Bulk-Driven Transistors 199 6.3 Sub-1V Bandgap Voltage Reference by Resistive Division 199 6.3.1 Resistive Divided VBE 202 6.3.2 Independent Biased Resistive Divided VBE 206 6.4 Peaking Current Source and VBE Compensation 209 6.5 Weighted DeltaVGS Compensation 211 6.6 Summary 214 6.7 Exercises 215 References 222 7 High Order Curvature Correction 223 7.1 Compensation Order 224 7.2 Second Order Temperature Compensation 228 7.2.1 Second Order Current Source 229 7.2.2 Current Subtraction 232 7.2.3 Current Addition 236 7.3 BJT Current Subtraction 238 7.4 Piecewise Linear Compensation 240 7.5 Sum and Difference of Sources with Similar Temperature Dependence 243 7.5.1 Difference of Voltages with Similar Temperature Dependence 244 7.5.2 Sum of Voltages with Inverted Temperature Dependence 245 7.5.3 Multi-threshold Voltages Curvature Compensated Voltage Reference 247 7.6 Summary 252 7.7 Exercises 253 References 257 8 CMOS Voltage Reference without Resistors 259 8.1 Generation of Weighted PTAT Source By Inverse Functions 260 8.1.1 Weighted Differential Circuit 260 8.1.2 Negative Impedance Converter 262 8.2 Resistorless Voltage and Current Sources 265 8.2.1 Resistorless Voltage Source 265 8.2.2 Resistorless Current Source 266 8.3 First Order Compensated Resistorless Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 268 8.3.1 Voltage Summation Based Resistorless Reference Circuit 269 8.3.2 Current Summation Based Resistorless Reference Circuit 270 8.4 Resistorless Sub-Bandgap Reference Circuit 270 8.4.1 The Voltage Summation Approach 271 8.4.2 CTAT Voltage Reduction 273 8.5 Summary 279 8.6 Exercises 280 References 281 A SPICE Model File 283 B SPICE Netlist of Voltage Reference Circuit 287 Index 289

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents recent advances in DSP to simplify, or increase the computational speed of, common signal processing operations. The topics describe clever DSP tricks of the trade not covered in conventional DSP textbooks. This material is practical, real-world, DSP tips and tricks as opposed to the traditional highly-specialized, math-intensive, research subjects directed at industry researchers and university professors. This book goes well beyond the standard DSP fundamentals textbook and presents new, but tried-and-true, clever implementations of digital filter design, spectrum analysis, signal generation, high-speed function approximation, and various other DSP functions.Trade Review“Great tips, tricks of the trade, secrets, practical shortcuts, and clever engineering solutions from seasoned signal processing professionals … Valuable signal processing techniques not taught in engineering schools .” (ITbriefing.net, 2 August 2012) Table of ContentsPreface xi Contributors xiii Part One Efficient Digital Filters 1. Lost Knowledge Refound: Sharpened FIR Filters 3 Matthew Donadio 2. Quantized FIR Filter Design Using Compensating Zeros 11 Amy Bell, Joan Carletta, and Kishore Kotteri 3. Designing Nonstandard Filters with Differential Evolution 25 Rainer Storn 4. Designing IIR Filters with a Given 3 dB Point 33 Ricardo A. Losada and Vincent Pellissier 5. Filtering Tricks for FSK Demodulation 43 David Shiung, Huei-Wen Ferng, and Richard Lyons 6. Reducing CIC Filter Complexity 51 Ricardo A. Losada and Richard Lyons 7. Precise Filter Design 59 Greg Berchin 8. Turbocharging Interpolated FIR Filters 73 Richard Lyons 9. A Most Effi cient Digital Filter: The Two-Path Recursive All-Pass Filter 85 Fred Harris 10. DC Blocker Algorithms 105 Randy Yates and Richard Lyons 11. Precise Variable-Q Filter Design 111 Shlomo Engelberg 12. Improved Narrowband Lowpass IIR Filters in Fixed-Point Systems 117 Richard Lyons 13. Improving FIR Filter Coeffi cient Precision 123 Zhi Shen Part Two Signal and Spectrum Analysis Tricks 14. Fast, Accurate Frequency Estimators 137 Eric Jacobsen, Peter Kootsookos 15. Fast Algorithms for Computing Similarity Measures in Signals 147 James McNames 16. Effi cient Multi-tone Detection 157 Vladimir Vassilevsky 17. Turning Overlap-Save into a Multiband, Mixing, Downsampling Filter Bank 165 Mark Borgerding 18. Sliding Spectrum Analysis 175 Eric Jacobsen and Richard Lyons 19. Recovering Periodically Spaced Missing Samples 189 Andor Bariska 20. Novel Adaptive IIR Filter for Frequency Estimation and Tracking 197 Li Tan and Jean Jiang 21. Accurate, Guaranteed-Stable, Sliding DFT 207 Krzysztof Duda 22. Reducing FFT Scalloping Loss Errors without Multiplication 215 Richard Lyons 23. Slope Filtering: An FIR Approach to Linear Regression 227 Clay S. Turner Part Three Fast Function Approximation Algorithms 24. Another Contender in the Arctangent Race 239 Richard Lyons 25. High-Speed Square Root Algorithms 243 Mark Allie and Richard Lyons 26. Function Approximation Using Polynomials 251 Jyri Ylöstalo 27. Efficient Approximations for the Arctangent Function 265 Sreeraman Rajan, Sichun Wang, Robert Inkol, and Alain Joyal 28. A Differentiator with a Difference 277 Richard Lyons 29. A Fast Binary Logarithm Algorithm 281 Clay S. Turner 30. Multiplier-Free Divide, Square Root, and Log Algorithms 285 François Auger, Bruno Feuvrie, Feng Li, and Zhen Luo 31. A Simple Algorithm for Fitting a Gaussian Function 297 Hongwei Guo 32. Fixed-Point Square Roots Using L-Bit Truncation 307 Abhishek Seth and Woon-Seng Gan Part Four Signal Generation Techniques 33. Recursive Discrete-Time Sinusoidal Oscillators 319 Clay S. Turner 34. Direct Digital Synthesis: A Tool for Periodic Wave Generation 337 Lionel Cordesses 35. Implementing a ΣΔ DAC in Fixed-Point Arithmetic 353 Shlomo Engelberg 36. Effi cient 8-PSK/16-PSK Generation Using Distributed Arithmetic 361 Josep Sala Part Five Assorted High-Performance DSP Techniques 39. Frequency Response Compensation with DSP 397 Laszlo Hars 40. Generating Rectangular Coordinates in Polar Coordinate Order 407 Charles Rader 41. The Swiss Army Knife of Digital Networks 413 Richard Lyons and Amy Bell 42. JPEG2000–Choices and Trade-offs for Encoders 431 Amy Bell and Krishnaraj Varma 43. Using Shift Register Sequences 441 Charles Rader 44. Efficient Resampling Implementations 449 Douglas W. Barker 45. Sampling Rate Conversion in the Frequency Domain 459 Guoan Bi and Sanjit K. Mitra 46. Enhanced-Convergence Normalized LMS Algorithm 469 Maurice Givens Index 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an overview of technologies to maximize the quality of user experience for mobile, data-centric applications.Table of ContentsPREFACE xiii ABOUT THE AUTHORS xix I INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL OBSERVATIONS 1 1 TECHNOLOGIES SUPPORTING MOBILE DATA 3 1.1 Introduction / 3 1.2 Computer Communication Networks / 5 1.3 IP Networks / 9 1.4 Cellular Data Networks / 12 1.5 Mobile Applications / 14 2 MOBILE DATA ECOSYSTEM 17 2.1 Introduction / 17 2.2 Mobile Data Ecosystem / 17 2.3 Mobile Data Growth / 22 2.4 Where is the Bottleneck? / 23 2.5 Impact of Mobile Data Growth on the Ecosystem / 25 3 AN OVERVIEW OF TECHNIQUES FOR BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION 29 3.1 Introduction / 29 3.2 Network Model / 30 3.3 Object Caching / 32 3.4 Object Compression / 34 3.5 Packet Compression / 35 3.6 Flow Sharing / 37 3.7 Content Transformation / 40 3.8 Just-in-Time Transmission / 41 3.9 Rate Control / 42 3.10 Service Differentiation / 43 4 AN OVERVIEW OF TECHNIQUES FOR COST REDUCTION 45 4.1 Introduction / 45 4.2 Infrastructure Sharing / 47 4.3 Virtualization / 48 4.4 Consolidation / 49 4.5 IT Usage in Networks / 52 II TECHNIQUES FOR MOBILE NETWORK OPERATORS 55 5 BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION AND COST REDUCTION IN THE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK 57 5.1 Introduction / 57 5.2 Upgrading the RAN / 58 5.3 Leveraging Additional Bandwidth / 65 5.4 Bandwidth Management / 68 5.5 Nontechnical Approaches / 72 6 BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION AND COST REDUCTION IN BACKHAUL AND CORE NETWORKS 75 6.1 Overview of Backhaul and Core Networks / 75 6.2 Technology Upgrade / 79 6.3 Traffic Offload / 80 6.4 Compression / 80 6.5 Transformation / 81 6.6 Caching / 83 6.7 Consolidation in Core Networks / 87 6.8 Network Function Virtualization / 88 6.9 Cost Reduction of the Supporting Infrastructure / 90 7 CONSUMER-ORIENTED DATA MONETIZATION SERVICES 91 7.1 Mobile Network Operator Differentiators for Consumer Services / 92 7.2 Single Sign-on Service / 93 7.3 Privacy Service / 98 7.4 Content Customization Services / 101 7.5 Location-Based Services / 103 7.6 Phone-Based Commerce / 106 7.7 Other Services / 107 8 ENTERPRISE-ORIENTED DATA MONETIZATION SERVICES 109 8.1 Model for Mobile Network Operator Services to the Enterprise / 110 8.2 Mobile Network Operator Differentiators for Enterprise Services / 111 8.3 Caching and Content Distribution / 114 8.4 Mobile Transformation / 115 8.5 Fog Computing / 116 8.6 Location-Based Services / 118 8.7 Secure Hypervisor Services / 120 9 APPLICATION SERVICE PROVIDER-ORIENTED DATA MONETIZATION SERVICES 123 9.1 Mobile Network Operator Differentiators for Application Service Providers / 124 9.2 Caching and Content Distribution / 126 9.3 Fog Computing / 127 9.4 Information Aggregation / 129 9.5 Information Augmentation / 130 9.6 Historical Information-Based Planning / 131 III TECHNIQUES FOR ENTERPRISES AND APPLICATION DEVELOPERS 135 10 AN INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE APPLICATIONS 137 10.1 Anatomy of Mobile Applications / 138 10.2 Types of Mobile Applications / 139 10.3 Developing for Multiple Platforms / 141 10.4 Operating System Version Management / 143 10.5 Limited Resources / 144 10.6 General Application Development Considerations / 145 11 POWER EFFICIENCY FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS 147 11.1 Model for Power Consumption / 148 11.2 Duty Cycling / 150 11.3 Power Mode Management / 151 11.4 Communication and Computation Clustering / 151 11.5 Efficient Resource Usage / 153 11.6 Best Practices for Application Power Efficiency / 154 12 BANDWIDTH EFFICIENCY FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS 159 12.1 Preloading / 160 12.2 Communication Clustering / 160 12.3 Context-Aware Communication / 161 12.4 Disconnected Operation / 162 12.5 Caching / 163 12.6 Compression / 163 12.7 Control Traffic Implications / 164 12.8 Best Practices for Bandwidth Efficiency / 165 13 MOBILE DATA ISSUES FOR THE ENTERPRISE 171 13.1 Mobile-Related Issues for the Enterprise / 172 13.2 Security Issues / 173 13.3 Backward Compatibility / 180 13.4 Infrastructure Issues / 182 14 RELATED TOPICS 185 14.1 Machine-to-Machine Communications / 185 14.2 Internet of Things / 186 14.3 Participatory Sensing / 187 14.4 Mobile Transformation of Business / 188 14.5 Software-Defined Networks / 189 14.6 Mobile First Philosophy / 190 14.7 Network Analytics / 191 14.8 Conclusions / 192 REFERENCES 193 INDEX 199

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive resource to designing and constructing analog photonic links capable of high RF performance Fundamentals of Microwave Photonics provides a comprehensive description of analog optical links from basic principles to applications. The book is organized into four parts.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Enabling Technological Advances and Benefits of Fiber Optic Links 6 1.2 Analog Versus Digital Fiber Optic Links 13 1.3 Basic Fiber Optic Components 18 1.4 Analog Links Within RF Systems 27 References 28 2 Analog Performance Metrics 33 2.1 The Scattering Matrix 34 2.2 Noise Figure 36 2.3 Dynamic Range 39 2.3.1 Compression Dynamic Range 39 2.3.2 Spurious-Free Dynamic Range 43 2.4 Cascade Analysis 52 References 54 3 Sources of Noise in Fiber Optic Links 57 3.1 Basic Concepts 58 3.2 Thermal Noise 62 3.3 Shot Noise 69 3.4 Lasers 74 3.5 Optical Amplifiers 93 3.5.1 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers 94 3.5.2 Raman and Brillouin Fiber Amplifiers 108 3.5.3 Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers 112 3.6 Photodetection 113 References 117 4 Distortion in Fiber Optic Links 124 4.1 Introduction 124 4.2 Distortion in Electrical-to-Optical Conversion 130 4.3 Optical Amplifier Distortion 134 4.4 Photodetector Distortion 138 4.4.1 Photodetector Distortion Measurement Systems 141 4.4.2 Photodetector Nonlinear Mechanisms 144 References 161 5 Propagation Effects 166 5.1 Introduction 166 5.2 Double Rayleigh Scattering 168 5.3 RF Phase in Fiber Optic Links 170 5.4 Chromatic Dispersion 173 5.5 Stimulated Brillouin Scattering 184 5.6 Stimulated Raman Scattering 190 5.7 Cross-Phase Modulation 193 5.8 Four-Wave Mixing 198 5.9 Polarization Effects 200 References 205 6 External Intensity Modulation with Direct Detection 212 6.1 Concept and Link Architectures 213 6.2 Signal Transfer and Gain 216 6.3 Noise and Performance Metrics 233 6.3.1 General Equations 234 6.3.2 Shot-Noise-Limited Equations 242 6.3.3 RIN-Limited Equations 247 6.3.4 Trade Space Analysis 250 6.4 Photodetector Issues and Solutions 251 6.5 Linearization Techniques 260 6.6 Propagation Effects 264 References 270 7 External Phase Modulation with Interferometric Detection 273 7.1 Introduction 273 7.2 Signal Transfer and Gain 275 7.3 Noise and Performance Metrics 287 7.4 Linearization Techniques 295 7.5 Propagation Effects 299 7.6 Other Techniques for Optical Phase Demodulation 304 References 308 8 Other Analog Optical Modulation Methods 312 8.1 Direct Laser Modulation 313 8.1.1 Direct Intensity Modulation 314 8.1.2 Direct Frequency Modulation 319 8.2 Suppressed Carrier Modulation with a Low Biased MZM 321 8.3 Single-Sideband Modulation 328 8.4 Sampled Analog Optical Links 330 8.4.1 RF Downconversion Via Sampled Analog Optical Links 333 8.4.2 Mitigation of Stimulated Brillouin Scattering with Sampled Links 336 8.5 Polarization Modulation 340 References 344 9 High Current Photodetectors 351 9.1 Photodetector Compression 352 9.2 Effects Due to Finite Series Resistance 355 9.3 Thermal Limitations 359 9.4 Space-Charge Effects 365 9.5 Photodetector Power Conversion Efficiency 370 9.6 State of the Art for Power Photodetectors 376 References 378 10 Applications and Trends 383 10.1 Point-to-Point Links 384 10.2 Analog Fiber Optic Delay Lines 393 10.3 Photonic-Based RF Signal Processing 398 10.3.1 Wideband Channelization 399 10.3.2 Instantaneous Frequency Measurement 401 10.3.3 Downconversion 404 10.3.4 Phased-Array Beamforming 405 10.4 Photonic Methods for RF Signal Generation 407 10.5 Millimeter-Wave Photonics 415 10.6 Integrated Microwave Photonics 419 References 427 Appendix I Units and Physical Constants 446 Appendix II Electromagnetic Radiation 450 Appendix III Power, Voltage and Current for a Sinusoid 453 Appendix IV Trigonometric Functions 455 Appendix V Fourier Transforms 458 Appendix VI Bessel Functions 460 Index 463

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Fundamental Science in Computer Science Is the Science of Thought For the first time, the collective genius of the great 18th-century German cognitive philosopher-scientists Immanuel Kant, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, and Arthur Schopenhauer have been integrated into modern 21st-century computer science. In contrast to the languishing mainstream of Artificial Intelligence, this book takes the human thought system as its model, resulting in an entirely different approach. This book presents the architecture of a thoroughly and broadly educated human mind as translated into modern software engineering design terms. The result is The Autonomous System, based on dynamic logic and the architecture of the human mind. With its human-like intelligence, it is capable of rational thought, reasoning, and an understanding of itself and its tasks. A system of thoughts must always have an architectural structure. Arthur Schopenhauer, Table of ContentsPreface xiii Introduction xix 1. The Architecture of the Autonomous System 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 The System Constellation, 1 1.3 System Constellation Architectural Overview, 3 1.4 The Constellation Architecture, 5 1.5 The Software Systems Comprising the Constellation, 8 2. The Architectural Methodology 22 2.1 Articulation of the Requirements and Design, 23 2.2 System Development and Integration Testing, 30 2.3 Phase I: The Idea, 33 2.4 Making Rational Judgments, 36 2.5 Phase II: The Concept, 38 2.6 Using JPL-STD-D-4000 for System Requirements, 39 3. The Architecture of the Will System 41 3.1 The Search for Truth, 41 3.2 The Nature of the Will, 45 3.3 Das Ding an Sich, 45 3.4 The Will as a System, 49 3.5 The Architecture of the Will System, 51 3.6 The Interfaces of the Will System, 53 3.7 The Subsystems of the Will System, 54 4. The Architecture of the Reason System 62 4.1 The Reason and Ethics, 62 4.2 The Nature of the Reason, 64 4.3 The Reason as a System, 65 4.4 The Architecture of the Reason System, 65 4.5 The External Interfaces of the Reason, 67 4.6 The Subsystems of the Reason, 68 5. The Architecture of the Intellect System 74 5.1 The Intellect as a System, 74 5.2 The Nature of the Intellect, 77 5.3 The Intellect as a System, 79 5.4 The Subsystems of the Intellect System, 80 5.5 The External Interfaces of the Intellect System, 81 6. The Architecture of the Presentation System 83 6.1 The Presentation System, 84 6.2 The Presentation as a System, 86 6.3 The Subsystems of the Presentation, 86 7. The Architecture of the Understanding System 90 7.1 The Understanding as a System, 92 7.2 The External Interfaces of the Understanding, 94 8. The Architecture of the Sensory System 98 8.1 The Sensory System, 98 8.2 The Architecture of the Sensory System, 100 8.3 The Phenomenon Subsystem, 101 8.4 A Historical Perspective on Languages, 104 8.5 The Workings of the Noumenon, 105 9. The Architecture of the Decision System 107 9.1 The Process of Decision Making, 107 9.2 Understanding the Decision Process, 111 9.3 The Decision as a System, 113 9.4 The Subsystems of the Decision System, 114 9.5 The Interfaces of the Decision System, 121 9.6 The Building of Preferences, 121 10. The Architecture of the Thought System 124 10.1 The "Movers" of the Thought Process, 125 10.2 The Pursuit of Thinking, 127 10.3 The Nexus Cogitationis, 128 10.4 The Subsystems of the Thought System, 130 10.5 Initialization Process of the Autonomous System, 136 Epilogue 142 Endnotes 144 Index 155

Read more less

Book SynopsisA real-world guide to practical applications of ground penetrating radar (GPR) The nondestructive nature of ground penetrating radar makes it an important and popular method of subsurface imaging, but it is a highly specialized field, requiring a deep understanding of the underlying science for successful application. Introduction to Ground Penetrating Radar: Inverse Scattering and Data Processing provides experienced professionals with the background they need to ensure precise data collection and analysis. Written to build upon the information presented in more general introductory volumes, the book discusses the fundamental mathematical, physical, and engineering principles upon which GPR is built. Real-world examples and field data provide readers an accurate view of day-to-day GPR use. Topics include: 2D scattering for dielectric and magnetic targets 3D scattering equations and migration algorithms Host medium characterTable of ContentsForeword xiii Acknowledgments xvii About the Author xix Contributors xxi 1 Introduction to GPR Prospecting 1 1.1 What Is a GPR? 1 1.2 GPR Systems and GPR Signals 4 1.3 GPR Application Fields 5 1.4 Measurement Configurations, Bands, and Polarizations 6 1.5 GPR Data Processing 8 2 Characterization of the Host Medium 10 2.1 The Characteristics of the Host Medium 10 2.2 The Measure of the Propagation Velocity in a Masonry 11 2.3 The Measure of the Propagation Velocity in a Homogeneous Soil 13 2.3.1 Interfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Null Offset: The Case of a Point-like Target 13 2.3.2 Interfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Null Offset: The Case of a Circular Target 17 2.3.3 Interfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Non-null Offset: The Case of a Point-like Target 18 2.3.4 Noninterfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Null Offset: The Case of a Point-like Target 22 2.3.5 Interfacial Data in Common Midpoint (CMP) Mode 25 2.4 Lossy, Magnetic, and Dispersive Media 27 Questions 31 3 GPR Data Sampling: Frequency and Time Steps 32 3.1 Stepped Frequency GPR Systems: The Problem of the Aliasing and the Frequency Step 32 3.2 Shape and Thickness of the GPR Pulses 36 3.3 Stepped Frequency GPR Systems: The Problem of the Demodulation and the Frequency Step 40 3.4 Aliasing and Time Step for Pulsed GPR Systems 45 Questions 47 4 The 2d Scattering Equations for Dielectric Targets 48 4.1 Preliminary Remarks 48 4.2 Derivation of the Scattering Equations Without Considering the Effect of the Antennas 51 4.3 Calculation of the Incident Field Radiated by a Filamentary Current 61 4.4 The Plane Wave Spectrum of an Electromagnetic Source in a Homogeneous Space 61 4.5 The Insertion of the Source Characteristics in the Scattering Equations 65 4.6 The Far Field in a Homogeneous Lossless Space in Terms of Plane Wave Spectrum 69 4.7 The Effective Length of an Electromagnetic Source in a Homogeneous Space 73 4.8 The Insertion of the Receiver Characteristics in the Scattering Equations 75 Questions 77 5 The 2d Scattering Equations for Magnetic Targets 79 5.1 The Scattering Equations with Only Magnetic Anomalies 79 5.2 The Contribution of the x-Component of the Fitzgerald Vector 83 5.3 The Contribution of the z-Component of the Fitzgerald Vector 88 5.4 The Joined Contribution of Both the x- and z-Components of the Fitzgerald Vector 93 5.5 The Case with Both Dielectric and Magnetic Anomalies 94 Questions 95 6 ILL-posedness and Nonlinearity 96 6.1 Electromagnetic Inverse Scattering 96 6.2 Ill-Posedness 97 6.3 Nonlinearity 97 6.4 The Ill-Posedness of the Inverse Scattering Problem 100 6.5 The Nonlinearity of the Inverse Scattering Problem 103 Questions 103 7 Extraction of the Scattered Field Data From the GPR Data 105 7.1 Zero Timing 105 7.2 Muting of Interface Contributions 106 7.3 The Differential Configuration 110 7.4 The Background Removal 111 Questions 115 8 the Born Approximation 116 8.1 The Classical Born Approximation 116 8.2 The Born Approximation in the Presence of Magnetic Targets 119 8.3 Weak and Nonweak Scattering Objects 120 Questions 121 9 Diffraction Tomography 122 9.1 Introduction to Diffraction Tomography 122 9.2 Diffraction Tomography for Dielectric Targets 123 9.3 Diffraction Tomography for Dielectric Targets Seen Under a Limited View Angle 130 9.4 The Effective Maximum and Minimum View Angle 140 9.5 Horizontal Resolution 142 9.6 Vertical Resolution 145 9.7 Spatial Step 147 9.8 Frequency Step 148 9.9 Time Step 149 9.10 The Effect of a Non-null Height of the Observation Line 150 9.11 The Effect of the Radiation Characteristics of the Antennas 156 9.12 DT Relationship in the Presence of Magnetic Targets 158 9.13 DT Relationship for a Differential Configuration 160 9.14 DT Relationship in the Presence of Background Removal 163 Questions 168 10 Two-dimensional Migration Algorithms 169 10.1 Migration in the Frequency Domain 169 10.2 Migration in the Time Domain (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 175 Questions 181 11 Three-dimensional Scattering Equations 182 Lorenzo Lo Monte, Raffaele Persico, and Raffaele Solimene 11.1 Scattering in Three Dimensions: Redefinition of the Main Symbols 182 11.2 The Scattering Equations in 3D 184 11.3 Three-Dimensional Green’s Functions 184 11.4 The Incident Field 185 11.5 Homogeneous 3D Green’s Functions 187 11.6 The Plane Wave Spectrum of a 3D Homogeneous Green’s Fucntion 192 11.7 Half-Space Green’s Functions 197 Questions 204 12 Three-dimensional Diffraction Tomography 205 12.1 Born Approximation and DT in 3D 205 12.2 Ideal and Limited-View-Angle 3D Retrievable Spectral Sets 210 12.3 Spatial Step and Transect 212 12.4 Horizontal Resolution (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 213 12.5 Vertical Resolution, Frequency and Time Steps 217 Questions 218 13 Three-dimensional Migration Algorithms 219 13.1 3D Migration Formulas in the Frequency Domain 219 13.2 3D Migration Formulas in the Time Domain 222 13.3 3D Versus 2D Migration Formulas in the Time Domain 226 Questions 228 14 The Singular Value Decomposition 229 14.1 The Method of Moments 229 14.2 Reminders About Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 231 14.3 The Singular Value Decomposition 234 14.4 The Study of the Inverse Scattering Relationship by Means of the SVD 238 Questions 241 15 Numerical and Experimental Examples 242 15.1 Examples with Regard to the Measure of the Propagation Velocity 242 15.1.1 Common Offset Interfacial Data with Null Offset on a Homogeneous Soil 242 15.1.2 Common Offset Interfacial Data on a Wall, Neglecting the Offset Between the Antennas 245 15.1.3 Interfacial Common Offset Data on a Homogeneous Soil: The Effect on the Offset Between the Antennas 247 15.1.4 Noninterfacial Common Offset Data with a Null Offset Between the Antennas 249 15.1.5 Common Midpoint Data 250 15.2 Exercises on Spatial Step and Horizontal Resolution 252 15.3 Exercises on Frequency Step and Vertical Resolution 264 15.4 Exercises on the Number of Trial Unknowns 271 15.5 Exercises on Spectral and Spatial Contents 274 15.6 Exercises on the Effect of the Height of the Observation Line 280 15.7 Exercises on the Effect of the Extent of the Investigation Domain 284 15.8 Exercises on the Effects of the Background Removal 295 15.9 2D and 3D Migration Examples with a Single Set and Two Crossed Sets of B-Scans (Marcello Ciminale, Giovanni Leucci, Loredana Matera, and Raffaele Persico) 304 15.10 2D and 3D Inversion Examples (Ilaria Catapano and Raffaele Persico) 311 Appendices 327 Appendix A (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 329 Appendix B 334 Appendix C 335 Appendix D 337 Appendix E 340 Appendix F (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 346 Appendix G: Answers to Questions 349 References 358 Index 365

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides up-to-date developments, methods, and techniques in the field of GIS and remote sensing and features articles from internationally renowned authorities on three interrelated perspectives of scaling issues: scale in land surface properties, land surface patterns, and land surface processes.Table of ContentsACKNOWLEDGMENTS ix CONTRIBUTORS xi AUTHOR BIOGRAPHY xv INTRODUCTION 1 1 Characterizing, Measuring, Analyzing, and Modeling Scale in Remote Sensing: An Overview 3 Qihao Weng PART I SCALE, MEASUREMENT, MODELING, AND ANALYSIS 11 2 Scale Issues in Multisensor Image Fusion 13 Manfred Ehlers and Sascha Klonus 3 Thermal Infrared Remote Sensing for Analysis of Landscape Ecological Processes: Current Insights and Trends 34 Dale A. Quattrochi and Jeffrey C. Luvall 4 On the Issue of Scale in Urban Remote Sensing 61 Qihao Weng PART II SCALE IN REMOTE SENSING OF PLANTS AND ECOSYSTEMS 79 5 Change Detection Using Vegetation Indices and Multiplatform Satellite Imagery at Multiple Temporal and Spatial Scales 81 Edward P. Glenn, Pamela L. Nagler, and Alfredo R. Huete 6 Upscaling with Conditional Cosimulation for Mapping Above-Ground Forest Carbon 108 Guangxing Wang and Maozhen Zhang 7 Estimating Grassland Chlorophyll Content from Leaf to Landscape Level: Bridging the Gap in Spatial Scales 126 Yuhong He PART III SCALE AND LAND SURFACE PROCESSES 139 8 Visualizing Scale-Domain Manifolds: A Multiscale Geo-Object-Based Approach 141 Geoffrey J. Hay 9 Multiscale Segmentation and Classification of Remote Sensing Imagery with Advanced Edge and Scale-Space Features 170 Angelos Tzotsos, Konstantinos Karantzalos, and Demetre Argialas 10 Optimum Scale in Object-Based Image Analysis 197 Jungho Im, Lindi J. Quackenbush, Manqi Li, and Fang Fang PART IV SCALE AND LAND SURFACE PATTERNS 215 11 Scaling Issues in Studying the Relationship Between Landscape Pattern and Land Surface Temperature 217 Hua Liu and Qihao Weng 12 Multiscale Fractal Characteristics of Urban Landscape in Indianapolis, USA 230 Bingqing Liang and Qihao Weng 13 Spatiotemporal Scales of Remote Sensing Precipitation 253 Yang Hong and Yu Zhang PART V NEW FRONTIERS IN EARTH OBSERVATION TECHNOLOGY 265 14 Multiscale Approach for Ground Filtering from Lidar Altimetry Measurements 267 JoseeL. Silvan-Cárdenas and Le Wang 15 Hyperspectral Remote Sensing with Emphasis on Land Cover Mapping: From Ground to Satellite Observations 285 George P. Petropoulos, Kiril Manevski, and Toby N. Carlson INDEX 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides the understanding and practical skills needed to develop and maintain an effective ESD control program for manufacturing, storage, and handling of ESD sensitive components This essential guide to ESD control programs explains the principles and practice of ESD control in an easily accessible way whilst also providing more depth and a wealth of references for those who want to gain a deeper knowledge of the subject. It describes static electricity and ESD principles such as triboelectrification, electrostatic fields, and induced voltages, with the minimum of theory or mathematics. It is designed for the reader to dip into as required, rather than need to read cover to cover. The ESD Control Program Handbook begins with definitions and commonly used terminology, followed by the principles of static electricity and ESD control. Chapter 3 discusses ESD susceptible electronic devices, and how ESD susceptibility of a component is measured. This is followed by the Seven habits of Table of ContentsIntroduction Foreword Preface Acknowledgements 1 Definitions and Terminology 1.1 Scientific notation and SI unit prefixes 1.2 Charge, electrostatic fields and voltage 1.2.1 Charge 1.2.2 Ions 1.2.3 Dissipation and neutralization of electrostatic charge 1.2.4 Voltage (potential) 1.2.5 Electric or electrostatic field 1.2.6 Gauss’s Law 1.2.7 Electrostatic attraction (ESA) 1.2.8 Permittivity 1.3 Electric current 1.4 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 1.4.1 ESD Models 1.4.2 ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) 1.5 Earthing, grounding and equipotential bonding 1.6 Power and Energy 1.7 Resistance, resistivity and conductivity 1.7.1 Resistance 1.7.2 Resistivity and conductivity 1.7.2.1 Surface resistivity and surface resistance 1.7.2.2 Volume resistance, volume resistivity and conductivity 1.7.3 Insulators, conductors, conductive, dissipative and antistatic materials 1.7.4 Point to point resistance 1.7.5 Resistance to ground 1.7.6 Combination of resistances 1.8 Capacitance 1.9 Shielding 1.10 Dielectric breakdown strength 1.11 Relative humidity and dew point References 2 The principles of static electricity and electrostatic discharge (ESD) control 2.1 Overview 2.2 Contact charge generation (triboelectrification) 2.2.1 The polarity and magnitude of charging 2.3 Electrostatic charge build-up and dissipation 2.3.1 A simple electrical model of electrostatic charge build-up 2.3.2 Capacitance is variable 2.3.3 Charge decay time 2.3.4 Conductors and insulators revisited 2.3.5 The effect of relative humidity 2.4 Conductors in electrostatic fields 2.4.1 Voltage on conducting and insulating bodies and surfaces 2.4.2 Electrostatic field in practical situations 2.4.3 Faraday cage 2.4.4 Induction: An isolated conductive object attains a voltage when in an electric field 2.4.1 Induction charging: An object can become charged by grounding it 2.4.2 Faraday pail and shielding of charges within a closed object 2.5 Electrostatic discharges 2.5.1 ESD (sparks) between conducting objects 2.5.2 ESD from insulating surfaces 2.5.3 Corona discharge 2.5.4 Other types of discharge 2.6 Common electrostatic discharge sources 2.6.1 ESD from the human body 2.6.2 ESD from charged conductive objects 2.6.3 Charged device ESD 2.6.4 ESD from a charged board 2.6.5 ESD from a charged module 2.6.6 ESD from charged cables 2.7 Electronic models of ESD 2.8 Electrostatic attraction (ESA) 2.8.1 ESA and particle contamination 2.8.2 Neutralisation of surface voltages by air ions 2.8.3 Ionisers 2.8.4 Rate of charge neutralisation 2.8.5 The region of effective charge neutralisation around an ioniser 2.8.6 Ioniser balance and charging of a surface by an unbalanced ioniser 2.9 Electromagnetic interference (EMI) 2.10 How to avoid ESD damage of components 2.10.1 The circumstances leading to ESD damage of a component 2.10.2 Risk of ESD damage 2.10.3 The principles of ESD control References Bibliography 3 ESD sensitive devices (ESDS) 3.1 What are ESD sensitive devices? 3.2 Measuring ESD Susceptibility 3.2.1 Modelling electrostatic discharges 3.2.2 Standard ESD susceptibility tests 3.2.3 ESD withstand voltage 3.2.4 Human Body Model component susceptibility test 3.2.5 System level Human Body ESD susceptibility test 3.2.6 Machine Model component susceptibility test 3.2.7 Charged Device Model component susceptibility test 3.2.8 Comparison of test methods 3.2.9 Failure criteria used in ESD susceptibility test 3.2.10 Transmission line pulse techniques 3.2.11 The relation between ESD withstand voltage and ESD damage 3.2.12 Trends in component ESD test 3.3 ESD susceptibility of components 3.3.1 Introduction 3.3.2 Latent failures 3.3.3 Built-in on-chip ESD protection and ESD protection targets 3.3.4 ESD sensitivity of typical components 3.3.5 Discrete devices 3.3.6 The effect of scaling 3.3.7 Package effects 3.4 Some common types of ESD damage 3.4.1 Failure mechanisms 3.4.2 Breakdown of thin dielectric layers 3.4.3 MOSFETs 3.4.4 Susceptibility to electrostatic fields and breakdown between closely spaced conductors 3.4.5 Semiconductor junctions 3.4.6 Field effect structures and non-conductive device lids 3.4.7 Piezoelectric crystals 3.4.8 Light emitting diodes 3.4.9 Magnetoresistive heads 3.4.10 MicroElectroMechanical Systems (MEMS) 3.4.11 Burnout of device conductors or resistors 3.4.12 Passive components 3.4.13 Printed circuit boards and assemblies 3.4.14 Modules and system components 3.5 System level ESD 3.5.1 Introduction 3.5.2 The relationship between system level immunity and component ESD withstand 3.5.3 Charged cable ESD (Cable Discharge Events) 3.5.4 System-Efficient ESD Design (SEED) References Bibliography 4.1 Why habits? 4.2 The basis of ESD protection 4.3 What is an ESDS? 4.4 Habit 1: Always handle ESD sensitive components within an ESD Protected Area (EPA) 4.4.1 What is an EPA? 4.4.2 Defining the EPA boundary 4.4.3 Marking the EPA boundary 4.4.4 What is an insignificant level of ESD risk? 4.4.5 What are the sources of ESD risk? 4.4.6 What ESD protection measures are needed in the EPA? 4.4.7 Who will decide what ESD protection measures are required? 4.5 Habit 2: Where possible avoid use of insulators near ESDS 4.5.1 What is an insulator? 4.5.2 Essential and non-essential insulators 4.5.3 Remove non-essential insulators from the vicinity of ESDS 4.6 Habit 3: Reduce ESD risks from essential insulators 4.6.1 What is an insulator? 4.6.1 Insulators cannot be grounded 4.6.2 What to do about ESD risk from essential insulators 4.6.3 Using ionisers to reduce charge levels on insulators 4.7 Habit 4: Ground conductors, especially people 4.7.1 What is a conductor? 4.7.2 Conductive, dissipative or insulative? 4.7.3 Properties of a conductor 4.7.4 Charge and voltage decay time 4.7.5 The importance of material contact resistance in protecting ESDS 4.7.6 Safety considerations 4.7.7 Elimination of ESD by grounding and equipotential bonding 4.7.8 Understanding the grounding (earth) system 4.7.9 Grounding personnel handling ESDS 4.7.10 Grounding ESD control equipment 4.7.11 What if a conductor cannot be grounded? 4.8 Habit 5: Protect ESDS using ESD packaging 4.8.1 Don’t take ordinary packaging materials into an EPA 4.8.2 The basic functions of ESD packaging 4.8.3 Only open ESD packaging within an EPA 4.8.4 Don’t put papers or other unsuitable material in a package with an ESDS 4.9 Habit 6: Train personnel to know how to use ESD control equipment and procedures 4.9.1 Why train people? 4.9.2 Who needs ESD training? 4.9.3 What training do they need? 4.9.4 Refresher training 4.10 Habit 7: Check and test to make sure everything’s working 4.10.1 Why do we need to check and test? 4.10.2 What needs to be tested? 4.10.3 ESD control product qualification 4.10.4 ESD control product or system compliance verification 4.10.5 Test methods and pass criteria 4.10.6 How often should ESD control items be tested? 4.11 The seven habits and ESD standards 4.12 Handling very sensitive devices 4.13 Controlling other ESD sources References Bibliography 5 Automated systems 5.1 What makes automated handling and assembly different? 5.2 Conductive, static dissipative and insulative materials 5.3 Safety and AHE 5.4 Understanding ESD sources and risks 5.5 A strategy for ESD control 5.5.1 General principles of ESD control in AHE 5.5.2 The conditions leading to ESD damage 5.5.3 Strategies for ESD control in automated equipment 5.5.4 Qualification of ESD control measures 5.5.5 Compliance verification of ESD control measures 5.5.6 ESD training implications 5.5.7 Modification of existing AHE 5.6 Determination and implementation of ESD control measures in AHE 5.6.1 Define the critical path of ESDS 5.6.2 Examine the critical path and identify ESD risks 5.6.3 Determine appropriate ESD control measures 5.6.4 Include ESD control in new equipment specification 5.6.5 Document the ESD control measures used in the machine 5.6.6 Implement maintenance and compliance verification of ESD control measures 5.7 Materials, techniques and equipment used for ESD control in AHE 5.7.1 Grounding all conductors that make contact with ESDS 5.7.2 Isolated conductors 5.7.3 Preventing induced voltages on ESDS 5.7.4 Reducing tribocharging of ESDS 5.7.5 Using resistive contact materials to limit charged device ESD current 5.7.6 Anodisation 5.7.7 Bearings 5.7.8 Conveyor belts 5.7.9 Using ionisers to reduce charge levels on ESDS, essential insulators and isolated conductors 5.7.10 Vacuum pickers 5.8 ESD protective packaging 5.9 Measurements in AHE 5.9.1 Overview of measurements in AHE 5.9.2 Resistance measurements 5.9.3 Electrostatic field and voltage measurements 5.9.4 Charge measurements 5.9.5 Measurement of the voltage decay time and offset voltage due to neutralization by an ionizer 5.9.6 ESD current measurements 5.9.7 Detection of ESD using EMI detectors 5.1 Handling very sensitive components References Bibliography 6 ESD control standards 6.1 Introduction 6.2 The development of ESD control standards 6.3 Who writes the standards? 6.4 The IEC and ESDA standards 6.4.1 Standards numbering 6.4.2 The language of standards 6.4.3 Definitions used in standards 6.5 Requirements of IEC61340-5-1 and ANSI/ESD S20.20 standards 6.5.1 Background 6.5.2 Documentation and planning 6.5.3 Technical basis of the ESD control program 6.5.4 Personal safety 6.5.5 ESD Coordinator 6.5.6 Tailoring the ESD program 6.5.7 The ESD Program Plan 6.5.8 Training Plan 6.5.9 Product Qualification Plan 6.5.10 Compliance Verification Plan 6.5.11 Test methods 6.5.12 ESD Control Program Plan technical requirements 6.5.13 ESD Packaging 6.5.14 Marking References Bibliography 7 Selection, use, care and maintenance of equipment and materials for ESD control 7.1 Introduction 7.1.1 Selection and qualification of equipment 7.1.2 Use 7.1.3 Cleaning, care and maintenance of equipment 7.1.4 Compliance verification 7.2 ESD control earth (ground) 7.2.1 What does the ESD control earth do? 7.2.2 Choosing an ESD control earth 7.2.3 Qualification of ESD control earth 7.2.4 Compliance verification of ESD control earth 7.2.5 Common problems with ground connections 7.3 The ESD control floor 7.3.1 What does an ESD control floor do? 7.3.2 Permanent ESD control floor material 7.3.3 Semi-permanent or non-permanent ESD control floor materials 7.3.4 Selection of floor materials 7.3.5 Floor material qualification test 7.3.6 Acceptance of a floor installation 7.3.7 Use of floor materials 7.3.8 Care and maintenance of floors 7.3.9 Compliance verification test 7.3.10 Common problems 7.4 Earth bonding 7.4.1 The role of earth bonding points 7.4.2 Selection of earth bonding points 7.4.3 Qualification of earth bonding points 7.4.4 Use of earth bonding points 7.4.5 Compliance verification of earth bonding points 7.5 Personal grounding 7.5.1 What is the purpose of personal grounding? 7.5.2 Personal grounding and electrical safety 7.5.3 Wrist straps 7.5.4 Footwear and flooring grounding 7.5.5 Grounding via ESD control seating 7.5.1 Personal grounding via an ESD garment 7.6 Work surfaces 7.6.1 What does a work surface do? 7.6.2 Types of work surfaces 7.6.3 Selection of a work surface 7.6.4 Workstation qualification test 7.6.5 Acceptance of work surfaces 7.6.6 Cleaning and maintenance of work surfaces 7.6.7 Compliance verification test of work surfaces 7.6.8 Common problems 7.7 Storage racks and shelves 7.7.1 Should it be an EPA rack or shelf? 7.7.2 Selection, care and maintenance of racks and shelves 7.7.3 Qualification test of EPA shelves and racks 7.7.4 Acceptance of shelves and racks 7.7.5 Cleaning and maintenance of shelves and racks 7.7.6 Compliance verification test of shelves and racks 7.7.7 Common problems 7.8 Trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.1 Types of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.2 Selection, care and maintenance of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.3 Qualification of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.4 Compliance verification of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.5 Common problems 7.9 Seats 7.9.1 What is an ESD control seat for? 7.9.2 Types of ESD seating 7.9.3 Selection of seating 7.9.4 Qualification test of seating 7.9.5 Cleaning and maintenance of seating 7.9.6 Compliance verification test of seating 7.9.7 Common problems 7.9.8 Personal grounding via ESD control seating 7.10 Ionisers 7.10.1 What does an ioniser do? 7.10.2 Ion sources 7.10.3 Types of ioniser system 7.10.4 Selection of ionisers 7.10.5 Qualification test of ionisers 7.10.6 Cleaning and maintenance of ionisers 7.10.7 Compliance verification test of ionisers 7.10.8 Common problems 7.11 ESD control garments 7.11.1 What does an ESD control garment do? 7.11.2 Types of ESD control garments 7.11.3 Selection of ESD control garments 7.11.4 Qualification test of ESD control garments 7.11.5 Use of ESD control garments 7.11.6 Cleaning and maintenance of ESD control garments 7.11.7 Compliance verification of ESD control garments 7.11.8 Personal grounding via an ESD garment 7.12 Hand tools 7.12.1 Why have ESD hand tools? 7.12.2 Types of hand tool 7.12.3 Qualification test of hand tools 7.12.4 Use of hand tools 7.12.5 Compliance verification test of hand tools 7.12.6 Common problems with ESD control hand tools 7.13 Soldering or desoldering irons 7.13.1 ESD control issues with soldering or desoldering irons 7.13.2 Qualification of soldering irons 7.13.3 Compliance verification of soldering irons 7.14 Gloves and finger cots 7.14.1 Why have gloves and finger cots? 7.14.2 Types of gloves and finger cots 7.14.3 Selection of gloves or finger cots for ESD control 7.14.4 Qualification test of gloves and finger cots 7.14.5 Cleaning and maintenance of gloves 7.14.6 Compliance verification test of gloves and finger cots 7.14.7 Common problems with gloves and finger cots 7.15 Marking of ESD control equipment References Bibliography 8 ESD control packaging 8.1 Why is packaging important in ESD control? 8.2 Packaging functions 8.3 ESD control packaging terminology 8.3.1 Terminology in general usage 8.1 ESD packaging properties 8.1.1 Triboelectric charging 8.1.2 Surface resistance 8.1.3 Volume resistance 8.1.4 Electrostatic field shielding 8.1.5 ESD shielding 8.2 Use of ESD protective packaging 8.2.1 The importance of ESD packaging properties 8.2.2 Packaging used within the EPA 8.2.3 Packaging used to protect ESDS outside the EPA 8.2.4 Packaging used for non-ESD susceptible items 8.2.5 Avoiding charged cables and modules 8.3 Materials and processes used in ESD protective packaging 8.3.1 Introduction 8.3.2 Antistats, pink polythene and low charging materials 8.3.1 Static dissipative and conductive polymers 8.3.2 Intrinsically conductive or dissipative polymers 8.3.3 Metallised film 8.3.4 Anodised aluminium 8.3.5 Vacuum forming of filled polymers 8.3.6 Injection moulding 8.3.7 Embossing 8.3.8 Vapour deposition 8.3.9 Surface coating 8.3.10 Lamination 8.4 Types and forms of ESD protective packaging 8.4.1 Bags 8.4.2 Bubble wrap 8.4.3 Foam 8.4.4 Boxes, trays and PCB racks 8.4.5 Tape and reel 8.4.1 Sticks (tubes) 8.4.2 Self-adhesive tapes and labels 8.5 Packaging standards 8.5.1 ESD control and protection packaging standards 8.5.2 Moisture barrier packaging standards 8.5.3 ESD control packaging measurements 8.6 How to select an appropriate packaging system 8.6.1 Introduction 8.6.2 Customer requirements 8.6.3 What is the form of the ESDS? 8.6.4 ESD threats and ESD susceptibility 8.6.5 The intended packaging task 8.6.6 Evaluate the operational environment for the packaging 8.6.7 Selecting the ESD packaging type and ESD protective functions 8.6.8 Testing the packaging system 8.7 Marking of ESD protective packaging References Bibliography 9 How to evaluate an ESD Control Program 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Evaluation of ESD risks 9.2.1 Sources of ESD risk 9.2.2 Evaluation of ESD susceptibility of components and assemblies 2 9.3 Evaluating process capability based on HBM, MM and CDM data 9.3.1 Process capability evaluation 9.3.2 Human body ESD and manual handling processes 9.3.3 ESD risk due to ungrounded conductors 9.3.4 Charged device ESD risks 9.3.5 Damage to voltage sensitive structures such as a capacitor or a MOSFET gate 9.3.6 Evaluating ESD risk from electrostatic fields 9.3.7 Troubleshooting 9.4 Evaluating ESD protection needs 9.4.1 Standard ESD control precautions do not necessarily address all ESD risks 9.4.2 Evaluating return on investment for ESD protection measures 9.4.3 What is the maximum acceptable resistance to ground? 9.4.4 Should there be a minimum resistance to ground? 9.4.5 ESD from charged tools 9.4.6 Use of gloves or finger cots 9.4.7 Charged cable ESD 9.4.8 Charged board ESD 9.4.9 Charged module or assembly ESD 9.5 Evaluation of cost effectiveness of the ESD control program 9.5.1 The cost of an inadequate ESD control program 9.5.2 The benefit arising from of the ESD control program 9.5.3 Evaluation of the cost of an ESD control program 9.5.4 Return on investment (ROI) in ESD control 9.5.5 Optimising an ESD control program 9.6 Evaluation of compliance of an ESD control program with a standard 9.6.1 Two steps to compliance evaluation 9.6.2 Using checklists to evaluate compliance of documentation with a standard 9.6.3 Evaluation of compliance of a facility with the ESD control program 9.6.4 Common Problems References 10 How to develop an ESD control program 10.1 What do we need for a successful ESD control program? 10.1.1 The ESD control strategy 10.1.2 How to develop an ESD control program 10.1.3 Safety and ESD control 10.2 The EPA 10.2.1 Where do I need an EPA? 10.2.2 Boundaries and signage 10.3 What are the sources of ESD risk in the EPA? 10.4 How to determine appropriate ESD measures 10.4.1 ESD control principles 10.4.2 Select convenient ways of working 10.5 Documentation of ESD procedures 10.5.1 What should the documentation cover? 10.5.2 Writing an ESD Control Program Plan that is compliant with a standard 10.5.3 Introduction section 10.5.4 Scope 10.5.5 Terms and definitions 10.5.6 Personal safety 10.5.7 ESD Control Program 10.5.8 ESD Program Plan 10.5.9 ESD Training Plan 10.5.10 ESD control product qualification 10.5.11 Compliance verification plan 10.5.12 ESD Program Technical requirements 10.5.13 ESD Protected areas 10.5.14 ESD protective packaging 10.5.15 Marking of ESD related items 10.5.16 References 10.6 Evaluating ESD protection needs 10.7 Optimising the ESD control program 10.7.1 Costs and benefits of ESD control 10.7.2 Strategies for optimisation 10.8 Considerations for specific areas of the facility 10.8.1 The varying ESD control requirements of different areas 10.8.2 Goods In and Stores 10.8.3 Kitting 10.8.4 Despatch 10.8.5 Test 10.8.6 Research and development 10.9 Update and improvement 11 ESD Measurements 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Standard measurements 11.3 Product qualification or compliance verification? 11.3.1 Measurement methods for Product Qualification 11.3.2 Measurement methods for Compliance Verification 11.4 Environmental conditions 11.5 Summary of the standard test methods and their applications 11.6 Measurement equipment 11.6.1 Choosing a resistance meter for high resistance measurements 11.6.2 Low resistance meter for soldering iron grounding test 11.6.3 Resistance measurement electrodes 11.6.4 Concentric ring electrodes for packaging surface and volume resistance measurement 11.6.5 Two-point probe for packaging surface resistance measurements 11.6.6 Footwear test electrode 11.6.7 Hand-held electrode 11.6.8 Tool test electrode 11.6.9 Metal plate electrode for volume resistance measurements 11.6.10 Insulating supports 11.6.11 ESD ground connectors 11.6.12 Electrostatic field meters and voltmeters 11.6.13 Charge Plate Monitors (CPM) 11.7 Common problems with measurements 11.7.1 Humidity 11.7.2 Accidental measurement of parallel paths 11.8 Standard measurements specified by IEC 61340-5-1 and ANSI/ESD S20.20 11.8.1 Resistance to ground 11.8.2 Point to point resistance 11.8.3 Personal grounding equipment tests 11.8.4 Surface resistance of packaging materials 11.8.5 Volume resistance of packaging materials 11.8.6 ESD Shielding of bags 11.8.7 Evaluation of ESD Shielding of packaging systems 11.8.8 Measurement of ioniser decay time and offset voltage 11.8.9 Walk test of footwear and flooring 11.9 Useful measurements not specified by IEC 61340-5-1 and ESD S20.20 11.9.1 Electrostatic fields and voltages 11.9.2 Measurement of electric fields at the position of the ESDS 11.9.3 Measurement of surface voltages on large objects using an electrostatic field meter calibrated as a surface voltmeter 11.9.4 Measurement of voltage on devices or small conductors 11.9.5 Resistance of tools 11.9.6 Resistance of soldering irons 11.9.7 Resistance of gloves or finger cots 11.9.8 Charge decay measurements 11.9.9 Faraday pail measurement of charge on an object 11.9.10 ESD event detection References Bibliography  12 ESD Training 12.1 Why do we need ESD training? 12.2 Training planning 12.3 Who needs training? 12.4 Training form and content 12.4.1 Training goals 12.4.2 Initial training 12.4.3 Refresher training 12.4.4 Training methods 12.4.5 Supporting information 12.4.6 Training considerations 12.4.7 Public tutorials and courses 12.4.8 Qualifications and Certification 12.4.9 National and International ESD groups and electrostatics interest organisations 12.4.10 Conferences 12.4.11 Books, articles and online resources 12.5 Electrostatic and ESD theory 12.5.1 The pro’s and con’s of theory 12.5.2 A technical and non-technical explanation of electrostatic charging 12.6 Demonstrations of ESD control related issues 12.6.1 The role of demonstrations 12.6.2 Demonstrating real ESD damage 12.6.3 The cost of ESD damage 12.7 Electrostatic demonstrations 12.7.1 The value of electrostatic demonstrations 12.7.2 The pro’s and con’s of demonstrations 12.7.3 Useful equipment for demonstrations 12.7.4 Showing how easy it is to generate electrostatic charge 12.7.5 Understanding electrostatic fields 12.7.6 Understanding charge and voltage 12.7.7 Tribocharging 12.7.8 Production of ESD 12.7.9 Equipotential bonding and grounding 12.7.10 Induction charging 12.7.11 ESD on demand – the “perpetual ESD generator” 12.7.12 Body voltage and personal grounding 12.7.13 Charge generation and electrostatic field shielding of bags 12.7.14 Insulators cannot be grounded 12.7.15 Neutralising charge - Charge decay and voltage offset of ionisers 12.8 Evaluation 12.8.1 The need for evaluation 12.8.2 Practical test 12.8.3 Written tests 12.8.4 Pass criteria References Bibliography 13 The future 13.1 General trends 13.2 ESD withstand voltage trends 13.2.1 Integrated circuit ESD withstand voltage trends 13.2.2 Other component ESD withstand voltage trends 13.2.3 Availability of ESD withstand voltage data 13.2.4 Device ESD withstand test 13.3 ESD control programs and process controls 13.3.1 ESD control program development strategies 13.3.2 Human body ESD 13.3.3 ESD between ESDS and conductive items 13.3.4 Charged board, module and cable discharge events 13.3.5 Optimisation 13.4 Standards 13.5 ESD control equipment and materials 13.5.1 ESD control materials 13.5.2 ESD protective packaging 13.6 ESD related measurements 13.6.1 ESD protective packaging measurements 13.6.2 Voltage measurement on ESDS and ungrounded conductors 13.6.3 Measurements related to ESD risk in automated handling equipment 13.7 System ESD immunity 13.8 Education and training References Bibliography Appendix A. An example draft ESD control program A. ESD program plan at XXX LTD A.1 Introduction A.2 Scope A.3 Terms and definitions A.4 Personal safety A.5 ESD control program A.5.1 ESD control program requirements A.5.2 ESD Coordinator A.5.3 Tailoring ESD control requirements A.6 ESD control program technical requirements A.6.1 ESD ground A.6.2 Personal grounding A.6.3 ESD Protected Areas (EPA) A.6.4 ESD protective packaging A.6.5 Marking of ESD related items A.7 Compliance verification plan A.8 ESD training plan A.8.1 General requirements of the ESD Training Plan A.8.2 Training records A.8.3 Training content and frequency A.9 ESD control product qualification A.10 ESD control program references References

Read more less

Book SynopsisA unified, coherent treatment of current classifier ensemble methods, from fundamentals of pattern recognition to ensemble feature selection, now in its second edition The art and science of combining pattern classifiers has flourished into a prolific discipline since the first edition of Combining Pattern Classifiers was published in 2004. Dr. Kuncheva has plucked from the rich landscape of recent classifier ensemble literature the topics, methods, and algorithms that will guide the reader toward a deeper understanding of the fundamentals, design, and applications of classifier ensemble methods. Thoroughly updated, with MATLAB code and practice data sets throughout, Combining Pattern Classifiers includes: Coverage of Bayes decision theory and experimental comparison of classifiers Essential ensemble methods such as Bagging, Random forest, AdaBoost, Random subspace, Rotation forest, Random oracle, and Error Correcting Output Code, amTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xxi 1 Fundamentals of Pattern Recognition 1 1.1 Basic Concepts: Class, Feature, Data Set 1 1.1.1 Classes and Class Labels 1 1.1.2 Features 2 1.1.3 Data Set 3 1.1.4 Generate Your Own Data 6 1.2 Classifier, Discriminant Functions, Classification Regions 9 1.3 Classification Error and Classification Accuracy 11 1.3.1 Where Does the Error Come From? Bias and Variance 11 1.3.2 Estimation of the Error 13 1.3.3 Confusion Matrices and Loss Matrices 14 1.3.4 Training and Testing Protocols 15 1.3.5 Overtraining and Peeking 17 1.4 Experimental Comparison of Classifiers 19 1.4.1 Two Trained Classifiers and a Fixed Testing Set 20 1.4.2 Two Classifier Models and a Single Data Set 22 1.4.3 Two Classifier Models and Multiple Data Sets 26 1.4.4 Multiple Classifier Models and Multiple Data Sets 27 1.5 Bayes Decision Theory 30 1.5.1 Probabilistic Framework 30 1.5.2 Discriminant Functions and Decision Boundaries 31 1.5.3 Bayes Error 33 1.6 Clustering and Feature Selection 35 1.6.1 Clustering 35 1.6.2 Feature Selection 37 1.7 Challenges of Real-Life Data 40 Appendix 41 1.A.1 Data Generation 41 1.A.2 Comparison of Classifiers 42 1.A.2.1 MATLAB Functions for Comparing Classifiers 42 1.A.2.2 Critical Values for Wilcoxon and Sign Test 45 1.A.3 Feature Selection 47 2 Base Classifiers 49 2.1 Linear and Quadratic Classifiers 49 2.1.1 Linear Discriminant Classifier 49 2.1.2 Nearest Mean Classifier 52 2.1.3 Quadratic Discriminant Classifier 52 2.1.4 Stability of LDC and QDC 53 2.2 Decision Tree Classifiers 55 2.2.1 Basics and Terminology 55 2.2.2 Training of Decision Tree Classifiers 57 2.2.3 Selection of the Feature for a Node 58 2.2.4 Stopping Criterion 60 2.2.5 Pruning of the Decision Tree 63 2.2.6 C4.5 and ID3 64 2.2.7 Instability of Decision Trees 64 2.2.8 Random Trees 65 2.3 The Naïve Bayes Classifier 66 2.4 Neural Networks 68 2.4.1 Neurons 68 2.4.2 Rosenblatt’s Perceptron 70 2.4.3 Multi-Layer Perceptron 71 2.5 Support Vector Machines 73 2.5.1 Why Would It Work? 73 2.5.2 Classification Margins 74 2.5.3 Optimal Linear Boundary 76 2.5.4 Parameters and Classification Boundaries of SVM 78 2.6 The k-Nearest Neighbor Classifier (k-nn) 80 2.7 Final Remarks 82 2.7.1 Simple or Complex Models? 82 2.7.2 The Triangle Diagram 83 2.7.3 Choosing a Base Classifier for Ensembles 85 Appendix 85 2.A.1 MATLAB Code for the Fish Data 85 2.A.2 MATLAB Code for Individual Classifiers 86 2.A.2.1 Decision Tree 86 2.A.2.2 Naïve Bayes 89 2.A.2.3 Multi-Layer Perceptron 90 2.A.2.4 1-nn Classifier 92 3 An Overview of the Field 94 3.1 Philosophy 94 3.2 Two Examples 98 3.2.1 The Wisdom of the “Classifier Crowd” 98 3.2.2 The Power of Divide-and-Conquer 98 3.3 Structure of the Area 100 3.3.1 Terminology 100 3.3.2 A Taxonomy of Classifier Ensemble Methods 100 3.3.3 Classifier Fusion and Classifier Selection 104 3.4 Quo Vadis? 105 3.4.1 Reinventing the Wheel? 105 3.4.2 The Illusion of Progress? 106 3.4.3 A Bibliometric Snapshot 107 4 Combining Label Outputs 111 4.1 Types of Classifier Outputs 111 4.2 A Probabilistic Framework for Combining Label Outputs 112 4.3 Majority Vote 113 4.3.1 “Democracy” in Classifier Combination 113 4.3.2 Accuracy of the Majority Vote 114 4.3.3 Limits on the Majority Vote Accuracy: An Example 117 4.3.4 Patterns of Success and Failure 119 4.3.5 Optimality of the Majority Vote Combiner 124 4.4 Weighted Majority Vote 125 4.4.1 Two Examples 126 4.4.2 Optimality of the Weighted Majority Vote Combiner 127 4.5 Naïve-Bayes Combiner 128 4.5.1 Optimality of the Naïve Bayes Combiner 128 4.5.2 Implementation of the NB Combiner 130 4.6 Multinomial Methods 132 4.7 Comparison of Combination Methods for Label Outputs 135 Appendix 137 4.A.1 Matan’s Proof for the Limits on the Majority Vote Accuracy 137 4.A.2 Selected MATLAB Code 139 5 Combining Continuous-Valued Outputs 143 5.1 Decision Profile 143 5.2 How Do We Get Probability Outputs? 144 5.2.1 Probabilities Based on Discriminant Scores 144 5.2.2 Probabilities Based on Counts: Laplace Estimator 147 5.3 Nontrainable (Fixed) Combination Rules 150 5.3.1 A Generic Formulation 150 5.3.2 Equivalence of Simple Combination Rules 152 5.3.3 Generalized Mean Combiner 153 5.3.4 A Theoretical Comparison of Simple Combiners 156 5.3.5 Where Do They Come From? 160 5.4 The Weighted Average (Linear Combiner) 166 5.4.1 Consensus Theory 166 5.4.2 Added Error for the Weighted Mean Combination 167 5.4.3 Linear Regression 168 5.5 A Classifier as a Combiner 172 5.5.1 The Supra Bayesian Approach 172 5.5.2 Decision Templates 173 5.5.3 A Linear Classifier 175 5.6 An Example of Nine Combiners for Continuous-Valued Outputs 175 5.7 To Train or Not to Train? 176 Appendix 178 5.A.1 Theoretical Classification Error for the Simple Combiners 178 5.A.1.1 Set-up and Assumptions 178 5.A.1.2 Individual Error 180 5.A.1.3 Minimum and Maximum 180 5.A.1.4 Average (Sum) 181 5.A.1.5 Median and Majority Vote 182 5.A.1.6 Oracle 183 5.A.2 Selected MATLAB Code 183 6 Ensemble Methods 186 6.1 Bagging 186 6.1.1 The Origins: Bagging Predictors 186 6.1.2 Why Does Bagging Work? 187 6.1.3 Out-of-bag Estimates 189 6.1.4 Variants of Bagging 190 6.2 Random Forests 190 6.3 AdaBoost 192 6.3.1 The AdaBoost Algorithm 192 6.3.2 The arc-x4 Algorithm 194 6.3.3 Why Does AdaBoost Work? 195 6.3.4 Variants of Boosting 199 6.3.5 A Famous Application: AdaBoost for Face Detection 199 6.4 Random Subspace Ensembles 203 6.5 Rotation Forest 204 6.6 Random Linear Oracle 208 6.7 Error Correcting Output Codes (ECOC) 211 6.7.1 Code Designs 212 6.7.2 Decoding 214 6.7.3 Ensembles of Nested Dichotomies 216 Appendix 218 6.A.1 Bagging 218 6.A.2 AdaBoost 220 6.A.3 Random Subspace 223 6.A.4 Rotation Forest 225 6.A.5 Random Linear Oracle 228 6.A.6 ECOC 229 7 Classifier Selection 230 7.1 Preliminaries 230 7.2 Why Classifier Selection Works 231 7.3 Estimating Local Competence Dynamically 233 7.3.1 Decision-Independent Estimates 233 7.3.2 Decision-Dependent Estimates 238 7.4 Pre-Estimation of the Competence Regions 239 7.4.1 Bespoke Classifiers 240 7.4.2 Clustering and Selection 241 7.5 Simultaneous Training of Regions and Classifiers 242 7.6 Cascade Classifiers 244 Appendix: Selected MATLAB Code 244 7.A.1 Banana Data 244 7.A.2 Evolutionary Algorithm for a Selection Ensemble for the Banana Data 245 8 Diversity in Classifier Ensembles 247 8.1 What is Diversity? 247 8.1.1 Diversity for a Point-Value Estimate 248 8.1.2 Diversity in Software Engineering 248 8.1.3 Statistical Measures of Relationship 249 8.2 Measuring Diversity in Classifier Ensembles 250 8.2.1 Pairwise Measures 250 8.2.2 Nonpairwise Measures 251 8.3 Relationship Between Diversity and Accuracy 256 8.3.1 An Example 256 8.3.2 Relationship Patterns 258 8.3.3 A Caveat: Independent Outputs ≠ Independent Errors 262 8.3.4 Independence is Not the Best Scenario 265 8.3.5 Diversity and Ensemble Margins 267 8.4 Using Diversity 270 8.4.1 Diversity for Finding Bounds and Theoretical Relationships 270 8.4.2 Kappa-error Diagrams and Ensemble Maps 271 8.4.3 Overproduce and Select 275 8.5 Conclusions: Diversity of Diversity 279 Appendix 280 8.A.1 Derivation of Diversity Measures for Oracle Outputs 280 8.A.1.1 Correlation 𝜌 280 8.A.1.2 Interrater Agreement 𝜅 281 8.A.2 Diversity Measure Equivalence 282 8.A.3 Independent Outputs ≠ Independent Errors 284 8.A.4 A Bound on the Kappa-Error Diagram 286 8.A.5 Calculation of the Pareto Frontier 287 9 Ensemble Feature Selection 290 9.1 Preliminaries 290 9.1.1 Right and Wrong Protocols 290 9.1.2 Ensemble Feature Selection Approaches 294 9.1.3 Natural Grouping 294 9.2 Ranking by Decision Tree Ensembles 295 9.2.1 Simple Count and Split Criterion 295 9.2.2 Permuted Features or the “Noised-up” Method 297 9.3 Ensembles of Rankers 299 9.3.1 The Approach 299 9.3.2 Ranking Methods (Criteria) 300 9.4 Random Feature Selection for the Ensemble 305 9.4.1 Random Subspace Revisited 305 9.4.2 Usability, Coverage, and Feature Diversity 306 9.4.3 Genetic Algorithms 312 9.5 Nonrandom Selection 315 9.5.1 The “Favorite Class” Model 315 9.5.2 The Iterative Model 315 9.5.3 The Incremental Model 316 9.6 A Stability Index 317 9.6.1 Consistency Between a Pair of Subsets 317 9.6.2 A Stability Index for K Sequences 319 9.6.3 An Example of Applying the Stability Index 320 Appendix 322 9.A.1 MATLAB Code for the Numerical Example of Ensemble Ranking 322 9.A.2 MATLAB GA Nuggets 322 9.A.3 MATLAB Code for the Stability Index 324 10 A Final Thought 326 References 327 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisAutonomic Intelligence Evolved Cooperative Networkingoffers a comprehensive advancement of the state-of-the art technological developments in the fields of Cooperative Networking and Autonomic Computing. Based on his track record in industrial standardisation, as well as academic and applied research, the author presents a fully-fledged Autonomic Cooperative Networking Architectural Model that encompasses the relevant workings of both the Layers of the Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model and the Levels of the Generic Autonomic Network Architecture. .Table of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii Acronyms xv Notation xxiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Autonomically Driven Cooperative Design 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Biologically Inspired Autonomics 8 2.2.1 Rationale and Vision 8 2.2.2 Nomenclatural Perspectives 12 2.2.3 Towards Self-Management 17 2.3 Emergent Autonomic Networking 21 2.3.1 Generic Autonomic Network Architecture 21 2.3.2 Decision-Making Entities 25 2.3.3 Abstraction Levels and Control Loops 30 2.4 Synergetic Cooperative Approach 34 2.4.1 Vertical Technological Pillars 34 2.4.2 Horizontal Architectural Extensions 38 2.4.3 Incremental Conceptual Outline 42 2.5 Conclusion 47 References 48 3 Protocol Level Spatio-Temporal Processing 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Multiple-InputMultiple-Output Channel 52 3.2.1 Diversity-Rooted Origins 52 3.2.2 Radio Channel Virtualisation 56 3.2.3 Capacity,Modelling, and Gains 60 3.3 Space-Time Coding Techniques 64 3.3.1 Orthogonal Block-Coded Designs 64 3.3.2 Derivation of Decoding Metrics 68 3.3.3 Trellis-Coded Approach 71 3.4 Protocol Level Overlay Logic 76 3.4.1 Autonomic Cooperative Node 76 3.4.2 Cooperative Transmission Decision Element 80 3.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 83 3.5 Conclusion 88 References 89 4 Function Level Relaying Techniques 93 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Conventional and Cooperative Relaying 94 4.2.1 Classification of Relaying Protocols 94 4.2.2 Collaborative and Supportive Protocols 98 4.2.3 Virtual Antenna Arrays 103 4.3 Fixed Relay Deployment Concepts 106 4.3.1 Grid-Based Manhattan Scenario 106 4.3.2 Noncooperative Approach Limitations 110 4.3.3 Cooperation-Enabled Indoor Scenario 111 4.4 Function Level Overlay Logic 119 4.4.1 Roots of Autonomic Cooperative Behaviour 119 4.4.2 Cooperative Re-Routing Decision Element 123 4.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 127 4.5 Conclusion 131 References 132 5 Node Level Routing Mechanisms 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Optimised Link State Routing Protocol 138 5.2.1 Functional and Structural Characteristics 138 5.2.2 Multi-Point Relay Station Selection Heuristics 142 5.2.3 Information Storage Repositories 146 5.3 Routing Information Enhanced Cooperation 150 5.3.1 Justification and Algorithmic Outline 150 5.3.2 Evolved Messaging Structure 154 5.3.3 Address Auto-Configuration and Duplication 158 5.4 Node Level Overlay Logic 162 5.4.1 Autonomic Cooperative Networking Protocol 162 5.4.2 Cooperation Management Decision Element 166 5.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 170 5.5 Conclusion 175 References 176 6 Network Level SystemOrchestration 179 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Standardisation Driven Design 180 6.2.1 Research and Investment Perspective 180 6.2.2 Staged Instantiation of Reference Model 183 6.2.3 Cross-Specification Extensions 187 6.3 Cooperative Emergency Networking 192 6.3.1 Emergency System Requirements 192 6.3.2 Autonomic Control Incorporation 197 6.3.3 Cooperative Enhancement Justification 201 6.4 Network Level Overlay Logic 203 6.4.1 Autonomic Cooperative Networking Architectural Model 203 6.4.2 Cooperation Orchestration Decision Element 209 6.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 213 6.5 Conclusion 217 References 218 7 Conclusion 223 A Appendix 227 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the state-of-the-art in digital games research and development for anyone working with or studying digital games and those who are considering entering into this rapidly growing industry.Trade Review“The broad overview of the field and the varied perspectives different chapters offer are valuable summaries of the state of the art in video game research. Both graduate students starting their research work and professional developers can benefit from this wide-ranging appraisal.” (Computing Reviews, 10 June 2015) Table of ContentsContributors ix Introduction 1 Marios C. Angelides and Harry Agius Part I Gaming Techniques and Tools 1. Toward the Adaptive Generation of Bespoke Game Content 17 Cameron Browne, Simon Colton, Michael Cook, Jeremy Gow, and Robin Baumgarten 2. Procedural Content Generation 62 Tom Betts 3. Content Generation in a Collaborative Browser-Based Game Environment 92 Juha-Matti Vanhatupa and Janne Lautamaki 4. Automatic Narratives in MMORPGs 111 Hao Wang 5. Collision Detection with Navigation Meshes 130 D. Hunter Hale and G. Michael Youngblood 6. Mass Population: Plausible and Practical Crowd Simulation 146 Sybren A. Stüvel, Cathy Ennis, and Arjan Egges 7. Synchronization in Multiplayer Online Games 175 Stefano Ferretti 8. Exchanging Social Information in Online Social Games 197 Fabrizio Davide, Stefano Triberti, and Francesco Collovà 9. Collaboration through Gaming 235 Damon Daylamani Zad, Marios C. Angelides, and Harry Agius 10. AI for General Strategy Game Playing 274 Jon Lau Nielsen, Benjamin Fedder Jensen, Tobias Mahlmann, Julian Togelius, and Georgios N. Yannakakis 11. Rated A for Advertising: A Critical Reflection on In-Game Advertising 305 Laura Herrewijn and Karolien Poels Part II Game Play 12. Immersion in Digital Games: Review of Gaming Experience Research 339 Paul Cairns, Anna Cox, and A. Imran Nordin 13. Know Thy Player: An Integrated Model of Player Experience for Digital Games Research 362 Malte Elson, Johannes Breuer, and Thorsten Quandt 14. At the Core of Player Experience: Continuation Desire in Digital Games 388 Henrik Schoenau-Fog 15. Empirical Game Aesthetics 411 Chris Bateman 16. Mobile Game Play and Everyday Life 444 Barbara Grüter, Nassrin Hajinejad, and Iaroslav Sheptykin 17. Video Games, Machinima, and Classic Cinema: Meaningful Gaming 471 Pilar Lacasa, María Ruth García-Pernía, and Sara Cortés 18. Video Games in Educational Settings: Developing Skills for New Media Learning 502 Ana Belen García Varela, Héctor Del Castillo, David Herrero, Natalia Monjelat, and Mirian Checa 19. Retro-Computing Community Sites and the Museum 523 Helen Stuckey and Melanie Swalwell 20. From the Deceptively Simple to the Pleasurably Complex: The Rise of Cooperative Address in the History of Video Games 548 Carl Therrien Part III Game Design and Development 21. Emotion in Games 575 Celso M. de Melo, Ana Paiva, and Jonathan Gratch 22. Task Deployment in Three Types of Game Spatial Structures 593 Chuen-Tsai Sun and Sheng-yi Hsu 23. Social Ontology of Digital Games 607 Ivan Mosca 24. Gaming with Purpose: Heuristic Understanding of Ubiquitous Game Development and Design for Human Computation 645 Lindsay D. Grace and Peter Jamieson 25. Beyond Stereotypes of Gender and Gaming: Video Games Made by Middle School Students 667 Jill Denner, Eloy Ortiz, Shannon Campe, and Linda Werner 26. Decade of Game Making for Learning: From Tools to Communities 689 Quinn Burke and Yasmin B. Kafai 27. Designing Interactive Tangible Games for Diverse Forms of Play 710 Tilde Bekker, Ben Schouten, and Mark de Graaf 28. Artisanal Local Networks: Game Work and Culture in Independent Game Production 730 Orlando Guevara-Villalobos Index 751

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers a thorough treatment of system and product development, where technical, productivity, and end user elements come together to generate value for stakeholders. Compiling over twenty years of research, the book applies a value approach to design, manufacturing, delivery, operations, and maintenance.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv 1 Preview of Best Practices 1 Resource and Note 3 Review Checklist 4 2 Stakeholder Values 5 2.1. Value and Stakeholder Identities 6 2.2. The Stakeholder Connection 7 Resources and Notes 11 Review Checklist 11 3 Role of Systems Engineering 13 3.1. Definition of a System 13 3.2. Industry Views 16 3.3. Stakeholders and Systems 17 3.4. System Value Stream 18 Resources and Notes 19 Review Checklist 19 4 Stakeholder Value Drivers 21 4.1. Value Analysis in a Strategic Framework 22 4.2. The QFD Stakeholder Values Matrix Process 22 4.3. QFD Process Summary 24 Resources and Notes 27 Review Checklist 27 5 Value-Driven Requirements Development 29 5.1. Establishing the Parameters 29 5.2. Translating Values to Requirements 32 5.3. Changing Requirements 34 5.4. Quantifying Requirements 35 5.5. Requirements Process Summary 37 Resources and Notes 39 Review Checklist 40 6 Functional Analysis 41 6.1. Functional Flows 41 6.2. Functional Block Diagrams 43 Resources and Notes 46 Review Checklist 46 7 Interface Definition and Management 47 7.1. Interface Complexity 48 7.2. The N-Squared Matrix 50 7.3. Interface Control 53 Resources and Notes 54 Review Checklist 54 8 Concept Selection and Trades 55 8.1. Concept Options 55 8.2. Concept Creativity 57 8.3. Decision Processes 59 8.4. Multidiscipline Analysis and Optimization 66 Resources and Notes 67 Review Checklist 67 9 Architectures and “Architecting” 69 9.1. Selecting an Architecture 69 9.2. Architectural Design 71 9.3. Architectural Imperatives and Precautions 72 Resources and Notes 78 Review Checklist 79 10 Failure Modes and Fault Tolerance 81 10.1. Causes of Failure 81 10.2. Failure Modes and Effects 84 10.3. Fault Tolerance 87 10.4. Redundancy Concepts 88 10.5. Human Factors and Hazards 91 10.6. Programmatic Failures and Fault Tolerance 93 10.7. Summary 93 Resources and Notes 94 Review Checklist 94 11 Risk Analysis 95 11.1. Risk Philosophies 95 11.2. Risk Management 96 11.3. Risk Mitigation Practices 100 Resources and Notes 105 Review Checklist 105 12 Integration, Verification, and Validation 107 12.1. Definitions 107 12.2. Planning Issues 109 12.3. Design Verification and Validation 109 12.4. Quality Assurance 110 12.5. Test Considerations 113 Resources and Notes 115 Review Checklist 116 13 Integrated Product and Process Development 117 13.1. Definitions 117 13.2. Integrated Project Teams 119 13.3. IPPD Benefits 123 Resources and Notes 125 Review Checklist 125 14 Design for X 127 Resources and Notes 130 Review Checklist 130 15 Development Management 131 15.1. Key Integrations 131 15.2. Strategic Approaches 132 15.3. Measuring Progress 133 Resources and Notes 141 Review Checklist 142 16 Cost Estimating 143 16.1. Stakeholder Involvement 143 16.2. Costing Factors 144 16.3. Estimating Methods 144 16.4. Learning Curves 148 16.5. Cost-Estimating Problems 149 Resources and Notes 151 Review Checklist 151 17 Lean Principles and Practices 153 17.1. Thinking Lean Precepts 154 17.2. Dealing with Waste 156 17.3. Lean Models 159 Resources and Notes 161 Review Checklist 162 18 Value Stream Mapping 163 18.1. Streamlining the Process 163 18.2. Adapting to New Developments 167 Resources and Notes 170 Review Checklist 171 19 Case Studies 173 Case Study 1: Health Management System for a Next-Generation UAV 173 Case Study 2: Product and Systems Development for the Unique Identification Authority of India 189 Case Study 3: Software Development for a Photovoltaic System Construction Project 196 Review Checklist 208 20 Process Summary and Tools 209 Appendix I: Notes on the Design Structure Matrix 215 Tyson R. Browning Appendix II: Lean Systems Engineering and Lean Enablers for Systems Engineering 221 Bohdan W. Oppenheim Appendix III: Introduction to Modeling and Simulation 235 Heinz Stoewer Appendix IV: Introduction to Multidisciplinary Analysis and Optimization 241 Juan J. Alonso Bibliography 247 Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe only book on integrated circuits for optical communications that fully covers High-Speed IOs, PLLs, CDRs, and transceiver design including optical communication The increasing demand for high-speed transport of data has revitalized optical communications, leading to extensive work on high-speed device and circuit design.Table of ContentsPreface to First Edition xiii Preface xv About the Author xvii 1 Introduction to Optical Communications 1 1.1 Brief History 1 1.2 Generic Optical System 2 1.3 Design Challenges 5 1.4 State of the Art 6 2 Basic Concepts 8 2.1 Properties of Random Binary Data 8 2.2 Generation of Random Data 12 2.3 Data Formats 14 2.4 Effect of Bandwidth Limitation on Random Data 16 2.5 Effect of Noise on Random Data 21 2.6 Phase Noise and Jitter 24 2.7 Transmission Lines 30 3 Optical Devices 36 3.1 Laser Diodes 36 3.2 Optical Fibers 46 3.3 Photodiodes 55 3.4 Optical Systems 58 4 Transimpedance Amplifiers 62 4.1 General Considerations 62 4.2 Open-Loop TIAs 73 4.3 Feedback TIAs 87 4.4 Supply Rejection 97 4.5 Differential TIAs 100 4.6 High-Performance Techniques 103 4.7 Automatic Gain Control 114 4.8 Case Studies 118 4.9 New Developments in TIA Design 122 5 Limiting Amplifiers and Output Buffers 130 5.1 General Considerations 130 5.2 Broadband Techniques 138 5.3 Output Buffers 149 5.4 Distributed Amplification 159 5.5 Other Broadband Techniques 171 6 Oscillator Fundamentals 185 6.1 General Considerations 185 6.2 Ring Oscillators 187 6.3 LC Oscillators 198 6.4 Voltage-Controlled Oscillators 211 6.5 Mathematical Model of VCOs 227 7 LC Oscillators 233 7.1 Monolithic Inductors 233 7.2 Monolithic Varactors 246 7.3 Basic LC Oscillators 248 7.4 Quadrature Oscillators 255 7.5 Distributed Oscillators 261 8 Phase-Locked Loops 264 8.1 Simple PLL 264 8.2 Charge-Pump PLLs 280 8.3 Nonideal Effects in PLLs 293 8.4 Delay-Locked Loops 300 8.5 Applications 302 9 Clock and Data Recovery 308 9.1 General Considerations 308 9.2 Phase Detectors for Random Data 320 9.3 Frequency Detectors for Random Data 333 9.4 CDR Architectures 338 9.5 Jitter in CDR Circuits 344 10 Multiplexers and Laser Drivers 356 10.1 Multiplexers 356 10.2 Frequency Dividers 364 10.3 Laser and Modulator Drivers 374 10.4 Design Principles 378 10.5 New Developments in Laser Driver Design 385 11 Burst-Mode Circuits 393 11.1 Passive Optical Networks 393 11.2 Burst-Mode TIAs 395 11.3 Burst-Mode CDR Circuits 404 11.4 Alternative BM CDR Architectures 413 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding a working level of expertise for the numerous non-specialists entering this rapidly growing industry, Electricity from Wave and Tide introduces all relevant topics in wind and tidal energy, from global resources and historical background to today's wave and tidal machines.Trade Review“This thoroughly readable and attractively illustrated volume certainly deserves a place on many a bookshelf.” (Underwater Technology, 1 March 2014) “With 165 full-colour illustrations and photographs of devices at an advanced stage, this book is both a valuable primer on marine energy and an inspiring picture of today’s most promising marine energy devices and developments.” (Real Power magazine, 1 October 2013) Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Marine energy and Planet Earth 1 1.2 Marine resources 5 1.2.1 Waves of the world 5 1.2.2 Tides of the world 11 1.3 A piece of history 18 1.3.1 Working with waves 18 1.3.2 Tapping tides 23 1.4 Power, energy and performance 27 1.5 Into the future 34 References 37 2. Capturing marine energy 39 2.1 Ocean waves 39 2.1.1 Linear waves 39 2.1.2 Random waves 43 2.1.3 Wave spectra48 2.1.4 Wave modification 52 2.1.5 Wave measurement 56 2.2 Wave energy conversion 59 2.2.1 Introductory 59 2.2.2 Types of wave energy converter 60 2.2.3 Principles of wave energy capture 62 2.2.3.1 Floating devices 62 2.2.3.2 Tuning and damping 64 2.2.3.3 When waves meet WECs 68 2.3 Tidal streams 71 2.3.1 Hydrodynamics 71 2.3.2 Tidal harmonics 76 2.3.3 Predicting tidal streams 83 2.4 Tidal stream energy conversion 86 2.4.1 Introductory 86 2.4.2 Tidal stream turbines 89 2.4.2.1 Turbine sizes and power ratings 89 2.4.2.2 Extracting energy: the Betz Limit 93 2.4.2.3 Lift and drag 96 2.4.2.4 Rotor speed and power coefficient 102 2.4.3 Turbine siting 105 2.5 Research and development 108 2.5.1 Models and test tanks 108 2.5.2 The European Marine Energy Centre (EMEC) 111 2.5.2.1 Wave and tidal test sites 111 2.5.2.2 Research activities 121 References 124 3. Generating electricity 125 3.1 Introductory 125 3.2 Power take-off 126 3.3 AC electricity 130 3.4 Generators 141 3.4.1 Introductory 141 3.4.2 Synchronous generators 147 3.4.3 Asynchronous generators 151 3.4.3.1 Squirrel-cage and wound-rotor induction machines 151 3.4.3.2 Doubly-fed induction generators 157 3.4.4 Linear motion generators 162 3.5 Connecting to the grid 166 3.5.1 Setting the scene 166 3.5.2 Grid strength and fault levels 169 3.5.3 Electrical quality 173 3.6 Large-scale renewable energy 175 3.6.1 Introductory 175 3.6.2 Intermittency and variability176 3.6.3 Capacity credit and backup generation 179 References 183 4. Case studies: Wave energy converters 185 4.1 Introductory 185 4.2 Case studies 186 4.2.1 Pelamis 186 4.2.2 Oyster 192 4.2.3 Limpet andMutriku 199 4.2.4 Wave Dragon 205 4.2.5 PowerBuoy® 211 4.2.6 Penguin 216 References 221 5. Case studies: Tidal stream energy converters 223 5.1 Introductory 223 5.2 Case studies 224 5.2.1 Andritz Hydro Hammerfest 224 5.2.2 Atlantis Resources 229 5.2.3 Marine Current Turbines 234 5.2.4 OpenHydro 240 5.2.5 Pulse Tidal 245 5.2.6 Scotrenewables Tidal Power 251 5.2.7 Tidal Generation 258 References 262 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisExtensively updated evaluation of current and future network technologies, applications and devices This book follows on from its successful predecessor with an introduction to next generation network technologies, mobile devices, voice and multimedia services and the mobile web 2.0.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Evolution from 2G over 3G to 4G 1 1.1 First Half of the 1990s—Voice-Centric Communication 1 1.2 Between 1995 and 2000: The Rise of Mobility and the Internet 1 1.3 Between 2000 and 2005: Dot Com Burst, Web 2.0, Mobile Internet 2 1.4 Between 2005 and 2010: Global Coverage, Fixed Line VoIP, and Mobile Broadband 4 1.5 2010 and Beyond 5 1.6 All over IP in Mobile—The Biggest Challenge 6 1.7 Summary 6 2 Beyond 3G Network Architectures 9 2.1 Overview 9 2.2 UMTS, HSPA, and HSPA+ 10 2.3 LTE 43 2.4 802.11 Wi-Fi 74 3 Network Capacity and Usage Scenarios 95 3.1 Usage in Developed Markets and Emerging Economies 95 3.2 How to Control Mobile Usage 96 3.3 Measuring Mobile Usage from a Financial Point of View 99 3.4 Cell Capacity in Downlink 100 3.5 Current and Future Frequency Bands for Cellular Wireless 105 3.6 Cell Capacity in Uplink 106 3.7 Per-User Throughput in Downlink 109 3.8 Per-User Throughput in Uplink 114 3.9 Traffic Estimation Per User 116 3.10 Overall Wireless Network Capacity 117 3.11 Network Capacity for Train Routes, Highways, and Remote Areas 124 3.12 When will GSM be Switched Off? 125 3.13 Cellular Network VoIP Capacity 127 3.14 Wi-Fi VoIP Capacity 130 3.15 Wi-Fi and Interference 132 3.16 Wi-Fi Capacity in Combination with DSL, Cable, and Fiber 134 3.17 Backhaul for Wireless Networks 138 3.18 A Hybrid Cellular/Wi-Fi Network Today and in the Future 143 4 Voice over Wireless 149 4.1 Circuit-Switched Mobile Voice Telephony 150 4.2 Packet-Switched Voice Telephony 153 4.3 SIP Telephony over Fixed and Wireless Networks 157 4.4 Voice and Related Applications over IMS 169 4.5 Voice over DSL and Cable with Femtocells 223 4.6 Unlicensed Mobile Access and Generic Access Network 228 4.7 Network Operator Deployed Voice over IP Alternatives 231 4.8 Over-the-Top (OTT) Voice over IP Alternatives 236 4.9 Which Voice Technology will Reign in the Future? 237 5 Evolution of Mobile Devices and Operating Systems 241 5.1 Introduction 241 5.2 The System Architecture for Voice-Optimized Devices 246 5.3 The System Architecture for Multimedia Devices 248 5.4 Mobile Graphics Acceleration 253 5.5 Hardware Evolution 256 5.6 Multimode, Multifrequency Terminals 273 5.7 Wireless Notebook Connectivity 276 5.8 Impact of Hardware Evolution on Future Data Traffic 277 5.9 Power Consumption and User Interface as the Dividing Line in Mobile Device Evolution 279 5.10 Feature Phone Operating Systems 280 5.11 Smartphone Operating Systems 282 5.12 Operating System Tasks 288 6 Mobile Web 2.0, Apps, and Owners 297 6.1 Overview 297 6.2 (Mobile) Web 1.0—How Everything Started 298 6.3 Web 2.0—Empowering the User 299 6.4 Web 2.0 from the User’s Point of View 299 6.5 The Ideas behind Web 2.0 306 6.6 Discovering the Fabrics of Web 2.0 310 6.7 Mobile Web 2.0—Evolution and Revolution of Web 2.0 321 6.8 (Mobile) Web 2.0 and Privacy and Security Considerations 334 6.9 Mobile Apps 340 6.10 Android App Programing Introduction 342 6.11 Impact of Mobile Apps on Networks and Power Consumption 349 6.12 Mobile Apps Security and Privacy Considerations 351 6.13 Summary 354 7 Conclusion 357 Index 361

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe confluence of cloud computing, parallelism and advanced machine intelligence approaches has created a world in which the optimum knowledge system will usually be architected from the combination of two or more knowledge-generating systems. There is a need, then, to provide a reusable, broadly-applicable set of design patterns to empower the intelligent system architect to take advantage of this opportunity. This book explains how to design and build intelligent systems that are optimized for changing system requirements (adaptability), optimized for changing system input (robustness), and optimized for one or more other important system parameters (e.g., accuracy, efficiency, cost). It provides an overview of traditional parallel processing which is shown to consist primarily of task and component parallelism; before introducing meta-algorithmic parallelism which is based on combining two or more algorithms, classification engines or other systems. Key features:Table of Contents1 Introduction and Overview 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Why Is This Book Important? 2 1.3 Organization of the Book 3 1.4 Informatics 4 1.5 Ensemble Learning 6 1.6 Machine Learning/Intelligence 7 1.7 Artificial Intelligence 22 1.8 Data Mining/Knowledge Discovery 31 1.9 Classification 32 1.10 Recognition 38 1.11 System-Based Analysis 39 1.12 Summary 39 References 40 2 Parallel Forms of Parallelism 42 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Parallelism by Task 43 2.3 Parallelism by Component 52 2.4 Parallelism by Meta-algorithm 64 2.5 Summary 71 References 72 3 Domain Areas: Where Is This Relevant? 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Overview of the Domains 74 3.3 Primary Domains 75 3.4 Secondary Domains 86 3.5 Summary 101 References 102 4 Applications of Parallelism by Task 104 4.1 Introduction 104 4.2 Primary Domains 105 4.3 Summary 135 References 136 5 Application of Parallelism by Component 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Primary Domains 138 5.3 Summary 172 References 173 6 Introduction to Meta-algorithmics 175 6.1 Introduction 175 6.2 First-Order Meta-algorithmics 178 6.3 Second-Order Meta-algorithmics 195 6.4 Third-Order Meta-algorithmics 218 6.5 Summary 240 References 240 7 First-Order Meta-algorithmics and Their Applications 241 7.1 Introduction 241 7.2 First-Order Meta-algorithmics and the “Black Box” 241 7.3 Primary Domains 242 7.4 Secondary Domains 257 7.5 Summary 271 References 271 8 Second-Order Meta-algorithmics and Their Applications 272 8.1 Introduction 272 8.2 Second-Order Meta-algorithmics and Targeting the “Fringes” 273 8.3 Primary Domains 279 8.4 Secondary Domains 304 8.5 Summary 308 References 308 9 Third-Order Meta-algorithmics and Their Applications 310 9.1 Introduction 310 9.2 Third-Order Meta-algorithmic Patterns 311 9.3 Primary Domains 313 9.4 Secondary Domains 328 9.5 Summary 340 References 341 10 Building More Robust Systems 342 10.1 Introduction 342 10.2 Summarization 342 10.3 Cloud Systems 350 10.4 Mobile Systems 353 10.5 Scheduling 355 10.6 Classification 356 10.7 Summary 358 Reference 359 11 The Future 360 11.1 Recapitulation 360 11.2 The Pattern of all Patience 362 11.3 Beyond the Pale 365 11.4 Coming Soon 367 11.5 Summary 368 References 368 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn in-depth look at the latest research, methods, and applications in the field of protein bioinformatics This book presents the latest developments in protein bioinformatics, introducing for the first time cutting-edge research results alongside novel algorithmic and AI methods for the analysis of protein data.Table of ContentsPREFACE ix CONTRIBUTORS xv I FROM PROTEIN SEQUENCE TO STRUCTURE 1 EMPHASIZING THE ROLE OF PROTEINS IN CONSTRUCTION OF THE DEVELOPMENTAL GENETIC TOOLKIT IN PLANTS 3 Anamika Basu and Anasua Sarkar 2 PROTEIN SEQUENCE MOTIF INFORMATION DISCOVERY 41 Bernard Chen 3 IDENTIFYING CALCIUM BINDING SITES IN PROTEINS 57 Hui Liu and Hai Deng 4 REVIEW OF IMBALANCED DATA LEARNING FOR PROTEIN METHYLATION PREDICTION 71 Zejin Ding and Yan-Qing Zhang 5 ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION OF PROTEIN POSTTRANSLATIONAL MODIFICATION SITES 91 Jianjiong Gao, Qiuming Yao, Curtis Harrison Bollinger, and Dong Xu II PROTEIN ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION 6 PROTEIN LOCAL STRUCTURE PREDICTION 109 Wei Zhong, Jieyue He, Robert W. Harrison, Phang C. Tai, and Yi Pan 7 PROTEIN STRUCTURAL BOUNDARY PREDICTION 125 Gulsah Altun 8 PREDICTION OF RNA BINDING SITES IN PROTEINS 153 Zhi-Ping Liu and Luonan Chen 9 ALGORITHMIC FRAMEWORKS FOR PROTEIN DISULFIDE CONNECTIVITY DETERMINATION 171 Rahul Singh, William Murad, and Timothy Lee 10 PROTEIN CONTACT ORDER PREDICTION: UPDATE 205 Yi Shi, Jianjun Zhou, David S. Wishart, and Guohui Lin 11 PROGRESS IN PREDICTION OF OXIDATION STATES OF CYSTEINES VIA COMPUTATIONAL APPROACHES 217 Aiguo Du, Hui Liu, Hai Deng, and Yi Pan 12 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN CRYOELECTRON MICROSCOPY 3D STRUCTURE RECONSTRUCTION 231 Fa Zhang, Xiaohua Wan, and Zhiyong Liu III PROTEIN STRUCTURE ALIGNMENT AND ASSESSMENT 13 FUNDAMENTALS OF PROTEIN STRUCTURE ALIGNMENT 255 Mark Brandt, Allen Holder, and Yosi Shibberu 14 DISCOVERING 3D PROTEIN STRUCTURES FOR OPTIMAL STRUCTURE ALIGNMENT 281 Tomáš Novosád, Václav Snášel, Ajith Abraham, and Jack Y. Yang 15 ALGORITHMIC METHODOLOGIES FOR DISCOVERY OF NONSEQUENTIAL PROTEIN STRUCTURE SIMILARITIES 299 Bhaskar DasGupta, Joseph Dundas, and Jie Liang 16 FRACTAL RELATED METHODS FOR PREDICTING PROTEIN STRUCTURE CLASSES AND FUNCTIONS 317 Zu-Guo Yu, Vo Anh, Jian-Yi Yang, and Shao-Ming Zhu 17 PROTEIN TERTIARY MODEL ASSESSMENT 339 Anjum Chida, Robert W. Harrison, and Yan-Qing Zhang IV PROTEIN–PROTEIN ANALYSIS OF BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS 18 NETWORK ALGORITHMS FOR PROTEIN INTERACTIONS 357 Suely Oliveira 19 IDENTIFYING PROTEIN COMPLEXES FROM PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTION NETWORKS 377 Jianxin Wang, Min Li, and Xiaoqing Peng 20 PROTEIN FUNCTIONAL MODULE ANALYSIS WITH PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTION (PPI) NETWORKS 393 Lei Shi, Xiujuan Lei, and Aidong Zhang 21 EFFICIENT ALIGNMENTS OF METABOLIC NETWORKS WITH BOUNDED TREEWIDTH 413 Qiong Cheng, Piotr Berman, Robert W. Harrison, and Alexander Zelikovsky 22 PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTION NETWORK ALIGNMENT: ALGORITHMS AND TOOLS 431 Valeria Fionda V APPLICATION OF PROTEIN BIOINFORMATICS 23 PROTEIN-RELATED DRUG ACTIVITY COMPARISON USING SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES 451 Wei Zhong and Jieyue He 24 FINDING REPETITIONS IN BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS: CHALLENGES, TRENDS, AND APPLICATIONS 461 Simona E. Rombo 25 MeTaDoR: ONLINE RESOURCE AND PREDICTION SERVER FOR MEMBRANE TARGETING PERIPHERAL PROTEINS 481 Nitin Bhardwaj, Morten Källberg, Wonhwa Cho, and Hui Lu 26 BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS–BASED ANALYSIS OF GENE EXPRESSION SIGNATURES 495 Gang Chen and Jianxin Wang INDEX 507

Read more less

Book SynopsisAcoustics deals with the production, control, transmission, reception, and effects of sound. Owing to acoustics being an interdisciplinary field, this book is intended to be equally accessible to readers from a range of backgrounds including electrical engineering, physics and mechanical engineering.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi List of Symbols xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of Acoustic Wave Motion 3 2.1 Fundamental Acoustic Concepts 3 2.2 The Wave Equation 5 3 Simple Sound Fields 11 3.1 Plane Waves 11 3.2 Sound Transmission Between Fluids 18 3.3 Simple Spherical Waves 22 4 Basic Acoustic Measurements 25 4.1 Introduction 25 4.2 Frequency Analysis 25 4.3 Levels and Decibels 29 4.4 Noise Measurement Techniques and Instrumentation 32 5 The Concept of Impedance 41 5.1 Mechanical Impedance 41 5.2 Acoustic Impedance 43 5.3 Specific Impedance, Wave Impedance and Characteristic Impedance 46 6 Sound Energy, Sound Power, Sound Intensity and Sound Absorption 49 6.1 Introduction 49 6.2 Conservation of Sound Energy 50 6.3 Active and Reactive Intensity 55 6.4 Measurement of Sound Intensity 61 6.4.1 Errors Due to the Finite Difference Approximation 63 6.4.2 Errors Due to Scattering 64 6.4.3 Errors Due to Phase Mismatch 64 6.5 Applications of Sound Intensity 68 6.5.1 Sound Power Determination 68 6.5.2 Noise Source Identification and Visualisation of Sound Fields 70 6.5.3 Transmission Loss of Structures and Partitions 70 6.5.4 Measurement of the Emission Sound Pressure Level 71 6.6 Sound Absorption 71 7 Duct Acoustics 75 7.1 Introduction 75 7.2 Plane Waves in Ducts with Rigid Walls 75 7.2.1 The Sound Field in a Tube Terminated by an Arbitrary Impedance 75 7.2.2 Radiation of Sound from an Open-ended Tube 82 7.3 Sound Transmission Through Coupled Pipes 86 7.3.1 The Transmission Matrix 87 7.3.2 System Performance 92 7.3.3 Dissipative Silencers 97 7.4 Sound Propagation in Ducts with Mean Flow 99 7.5 Three-dimensional Waves in Ducts with Rigid Walls 101 7.5.1 The Sound Field in a Duct with Rectangular Cross Section 101 7.5.2 The Sound Field in a Duct with Circular Cross Section 107 7.5.3 The Sound Field in a Duct with Arbitrary Cross-sectional Shape 114 7.6 The Green’s Function in a Semi-infinite Duct 116 7.7 Sound Propagation in Ducts with Walls of Finite Impedance 122 7.7.1 Ducts with Nearly Hard Walls 123 7.7.2 Lined Ducts 125 8 Sound in Enclosures 127 8.1 Introduction 127 8.2 The Modal Theory of Sound in Enclosures 127 8.2.1 Eigenfrequencies and Mode Shapes 128 8.2.2 The Modal Density 132 8.2.3 The Green’s Function in an Enclosure 133 8.3 Statistical Room Acoustics 137 8.3.1 The Perfectly Diffuse Sound Field 139 8.3.2 The Sound Field in a Reverberation Room Driven with a Pure Tone 142 8.3.3 Frequency Averaging 147 8.3.4 The Sound Power Emitted by a Point Source in a Lightly Damped Room 148 8.4 The Decay of Sound in a Lightly Damped Room 151 8.4.1 The Modal Approach to Decay of Sound 151 8.4.2 The Statistical Approach to Decay of Sound 154 8.5 Applications of Reverberation Rooms 155 8.5.1 Sound Power Determination 155 8.5.2 Measurement of Sound Absorption 156 8.5.3 Measurement of Transmission Loss 156 9 Sound Radiation and Scattering 159 9.1 Introduction 159 9.2 Point Sources 159 9.2.1 Reciprocity 165 9.2.2 Sound Power Interaction of Coherent Sources 166 9.2.3 Fundamentals of Beamforming 169 9.3 Cylindrical Waves 171 9.3.1 Radiation from Cylindrical Sources 171 9.3.2 Scattering by Cylinders 183 9.4 Spherical Waves 187 9.4.1 Radiation from Spherical Sources 187 9.4.2 Scattering by Spheres 199 9.4.3 Ambisonics 201 9.5 Plane Sources 202 9.5.1 The Rayleigh Integral 203 9.5.2 The Wavenumber Approach 207 9.5.3 Fundamentals of Near Field Acoustic Holography 211 9.6 The Kirchhoff-Helmholtz Integral Equation 213 Appendix A Complex Representation of Harmonic Functions of Time 217 Appendix B Signal Analysis and Processing 221 B.1 Introduction 221 B.2 Classification of Signals 221 B.3 Transient Signals 222 B.3.1 The Fourier Transform 223 B.3.2 Time Windows 229 B.4 Periodic Signals 230 B.4.1 Fourier Series 230 B.4.2 The Fourier Transform of a Periodic Signal 232 B.4.3 Estimation of the Spectrum of a Periodic Signal 234 B.5 Random Signals 235 B.5.1 Autocorrelation Functions and Power Spectra 237 B.5.2 Cross-correlation Functions and Cross-power Spectra 239 B.5.3 Estimation of Correlation Functions and Power Spectra 241 B.6 Linear Systems 243 B.6.1 Impulse Response and Frequency Response 244 B.6.2 Estimation of the Frequency Response of a Linear System 248 B.6.3 Estimation of the Frequency Response of a Weakly Nonlinear System 254 B.7 Digital Signal Processing 255 B.7.1 Sampling 255 B.7.2 The Discrete Fourier Transform 256 B.7.3 Signal Analysis with the 'Fast Fourier Transform' (FFT) 257 B.7.4 The Method Based on 'Maximum Length Sequences' (MLS) 260 Appendix C Cylindrical and Spherical Bessel Functions; Legendre Functions; and Expansion Coefficients 263 C.1 Cylindrical Bessel Functions 263 C.2 Legendre Functions 265 C.3 Spherical Bessel Functions 266 C.4 Expansion Coefficients 267 Appendix D Fundamentals of Probability and Random Variables 269 D.1 Random Variables 269 D.2 The Central Limit Theorem 270 D.3 Chi and Chi-Square Statistics 270 Reference 271 Bibliography 273 Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisWinner, 2013 PROSE Award, Engineering and Technology Concise, high quality and comparative overview of state-of-the-art electron device development, manufacturing technologies and applications Guide to State-of-the-Art Electron Devices marks the 60th anniversary of the IRE electron devices committee and the 35th anniversary of the IEEE Electron Devices Society, as such it defines the state-of-the-art of electron devices, as well as future directions across the entire field. Spans full range of electron device types such as photovoltaic devices, semiconductor manufacturing and VLSI technology and circuits, covered by IEEE Electron and Devices Society Contributed by internationally respected members of the electron devices community A timely desk reference with fully-integrated colour and a unique lay-out with sidebars to highlight the key terms Discusses the historical developments and speculates on future trends to Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Contributors xvii Acknowledgments xix Introduction: Historic Timeline xxi PART I BASIC ELECTRON DEVICES 1 Bipolar Transistors 3 John D. Cressler and Katsuyoshi Washio 1.1 Motivation 3 1.2 The pn Junction and its Electronic Applications 5 1.3 The Bipolar Junction Transistor and its Electronic Applications 10 1.4 Optimization of Bipolar Transistors 15 1.5 Silicon-Germanium Heterojunction Bipolar Transistors 17 References 19 2 MOSFETs 21 Hiroshi Iwai, Simon Min Sze, Yuan Taur and Hei Wong 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 MOSFET Basics 21 2.3 The Evolution of MOSFETs 27 2.4 Closing Remarks 31 References 31 3 Memory Devices 37 Kinam Kim and Dong Jin Jung 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 Volatile Memories 39 3.3 Non-Volatile Memories 41 3.4 Future Perspectives of MOS Memories 43 3.5 Closing Remarks 45 References 46 4 Passive Components 49 Joachim N. Burghartz and Colin C. McAndrew 4.1 Discrete and Integrated Passive Components 49 4.2 Application in Analog ICs and DRAM 52 4.3 The Planar Spiral Inductor–A Case Study 54 4.4 Parasitics in Integrated Circuits 57 References 57 5 Emerging Devices 59 Supriyo Bandyopadhyay, Marc Cahay and Avik W. Ghosh 5.1 Non-Charge-Based Switching 59 5.2 Carbon as a Replacement for Silicon and the Rise of Grpahene Electronics and Moletronics 63 5.3 Closing Remarks 66 References 67 PART II ASPECTS OF DEVICE AND IC MANUFACTURING 6 Electronic Materials 71 James C. Sturm, Ken Rim, James S. Harris and Chung-Chih Wu 6.1 Introduction 71 6.2 Silicon Device Technology 71 6.3 Compound Semiconductor Devices 75 6.4 Electronic Displays 79 6.5 Closing Remarks 82 References 83 7 Compact Modeling 85 Colin C. McAndrew and Laurence W. Nagel 7.1 The Role of Compact Models 85 7.2 Bipolar Transistor Compact Modeling 87 7.3 MOS Transistor Compact Modeling 89 7.4 Compact Modeling of Passive Components 92 7.5 Benchmarking and Implementation 94 References 94 8 Technology Computer Aided Design 97 David Esseni, Christoph Jungemann, J¨urgen Lorenz, Pierpaolo Palestri, Enrico Sangiorgi and Luca Selmi 8.1 Introduction 97 8.2 Drift-Diffusion Model 98 8.3 Microscopic Transport Models 100 8.4 Quantum Transport Models 101 8.5 Process and Equipment Simulation 102 References 105 9 Reliability of Electron Devices, Interconnects and Circuits 107 Anthony S. Oates, Richard C. Blish, Gennadi Bersuker and Lu Kasprzak 9.1 Introduction and Background 107 9.2 Device Reliability Issues 109 9.3 Circuit-Level Reliability Issues 114 9.4 Microscopic Approaches to Assuring Reliability of ICs 117 References 117 10 Semiconductor Manufacturing 121 Rajendra Singh, Luigi Colombo, Klaus Schuegraf, Robert Doering and Alain Diebold 10.1 Introduction 121 10.2 Substrates 122 10.3 Lithography and Etching 122 10.4 Front-End Processing 124 10.5 Back-End Processing 125 10.6 Process Control 128 10.7 Assembly and Test 129 10.8 Future Directions 131 References 131 PART III APPLICATIONS BASED ON ELECTRON DEVICES 11 VLSI Technology and Circuits 135 Kaustav Banerjee and Shuji Ikeda 11.1 Introduction 135 11.2 MOSFET Scaling Trends 136 11.3 Low-Power and High-Speed Logic Design 137 11.4 Scaling Driven Technology Enhancements 139 11.5 Ultra-Low Voltage Transistors 144 11.6 Interconnects 144 11.7 Memory Design 148 11.8 System Integration 150 References 152 12 Mixed-Signal Technologies and Integrated Circuits 157 Bin Zhao and James A. Hutchby 12.1 Introduction 157 12.2 Analog/Mixed-Signal Technologies in Scaled CMOS 159 12.3 Data Converter ICs 161 12.4 Mixed-Signal Circuits for Low Power Displays 164 12.5 Image Sensor Technologies and Circuits 166 References 168 13 Memory Technologies 171 Stephen Parke, Kristy A. Campbell and Chandra Mouli 13.1 Semiconductor Memory History 171 13.2 State of Mainstream Semiconductor Memory Today 178 13.3 Emerging Memory Technologies 183 13.4 Closing Remarks 185 References 186 14 RF and Microwave Semiconductor Technologies 189 Giovanni Ghione, Fabrizio Bonani, Ruediger Quay and Erich Kasper 14.1 III-V-Based: GaAs and InP 189 14.2 Si and SiGe 194 14.3 Wide Bandgap Devices (Group-III Nitrides, SiC and Diamond) 197 References 199 15 Power Devices and ICs 203 Richard K. Williams, Mohamed N. Darwish, Theodore J. Letavic and Mikael O¨stling 15.1 Overview of Power Devices and ICs 203 15.2 Two-Carrier and High-Power Devices 205 15.3 Power MOSFET Devices 206 15.4 High-Voltage and Power ICs 209 15.5 Wide Bandgap Power Devices 210 References 211 16 Photovoltaic Devices 213 Steven A. Ringel, Timothy J. Anderson, Martin A. Green, Rajendra Singh and Robert J. Walters 16.1 Introduction 213 16.2 Silicon Photovoltaics 215 16.3 Polycrystalline Thin-Film Photovoltaics 218 16.4 III-V Compound Photovoltaics 219 16.5 Future Concepts in Photovoltaics 220 References 222 17 Large Area Electronics 225 Arokia Nathan, Arman Ahnood, Jackson Lai and Xiaojun Guo 17.1 Thin-Film Solar Cells 225 17.2 Large Area Imaging 229 17.3 Flat Panel Displays 233 References 235 18 Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) 239 Darrin J. Young and Hanseup Kim 18.1 Introduction 239 18.2 The 1960s – First Micromachined Structures Envisioned 239 18.3 The 1970s – Integrated Sensors Started 240 18.4 The 1980s – Surface Micromachining Emerged 241 18.5 The 1990s – MEMS Impacted Various Fields 244 18.6 The 2000s – Diversified Sophisticated Systems Enabled by MEMS 247 18.7 Future Outlook 248 References 248 19 Vacuum Device Applications 251 David K. Abe, Baruch Levush, Carter M. Armstrong, Thomas Grant and William L. Menninger 19.1 Introduction 251 19.2 Traveling-Wave Devices 252 19.3 Klystrons 255 19.4 Inductive Output Tubes 258 19.5 Crossed-Field Devices 259 19.6 Gyro-Devices 260 References 262 20 Optoelectronic Devices 265 Leda Lunardi, Sudha Mokkapati and Chennupati Jagadish 20.1 Introduction 265 20.2 Light Emission in Semiconductors 266 20.3 Photodetectors 268 20.4 Integrated Optoelectronics 269 20.5 Optical Interconnects 271 20.6 Closing Remarks 271 References 271 21 Devices for the Post CMOS Era 275 Wilfried Haensch 21.1 Introduction 275 21.2 Devices for the 8-nm Node with Conventional Materials 277 21.3 New Channel Materials and Devices 282 21.4 Closing Remarks 287 References 287 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresented in three parts, this book provides readers with an immersive introduction to this rapidly growing segment of the computer industry.Table of ContentsPreface xv Contributors xvii 1 Low Power Multicore Processors for Embedded Systems 1 Fumio Arakawa 1.1 Multicore Chip with Highly Efficient Cores 1 1.2 SuperH RISC Engine Family (SH) Processor Cores 5 1.3 SH-X: A Highly Efficient CPU Core 9 1.4 SH-X FPU: A Highly Efficient FPU 20 1.5 SH-X2: Frequency and Efficiency Enhanced Core 33 1.6 SH-X3: Multicore Architecture Extension 34 1.7 SH-X4: ISA and Address Space Extension 47 2 Special-Purpose Hardware for Computational Biology 61 Siddharth Srinivasan 2.1 Molecular Dynamics Simulations on Graphics Processing Units 62 2.2 Special-Purpose Hardware and Network Topologies for MD Simulations 72 2.3 Quantum MC Applications on Field-Programmable Gate Arrays 77 2.4 Conclusions and Future Directions 82 3 Embedded GPU Design 85 Byeong-Gyu Nam and Hoi-Jun Yoo 3.1 Introduction 85 3.2 System Architecture 86 3.3 Graphics Modules Design 88 3.4 System Power Management 95 3.5 Implementation Results 99 3.6 Conclusion 102 4 Low-Cost VLSI Architecture for Random Block-Based Access of Pixels in Modern Image Sensors 107 Tareq Hasan Khan and Khan Wahid 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 The DVP Interface 108 4.3 The iBRIDGE-BB Architecture 109 4.4 Hardware Implementation 116 4.5 Conclusion 123 5 Embedded Computing Systems on FPGAs 127 Lesley Shannon 5.1 FPGA Architecture 128 5.2 FPGA Confi guration Technology 129 5.3 Software Support 133 5.4 Final Summary of Challenges and Opportunities for Embedded Computing Design on FPGAs 135 6 FPGA-Based Emulation Support for Design Space Exploration 139 Paolo Meloni, Simone Secchi, and Luigi Raffo 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 State of the Art 140 6.3 A Tool for Energy-Aware FPGA-Based Emulation: The MADNESS Project Experience 144 6.4 Enabling FPGA-Based DSE: Runtime-Reconfi gurable Emulators 147 6.5 Use Cases 161 7 FPGA Coprocessing Solution for Real-Time Protein Identifi cation Using Tandem Mass Spectrometry 169 Daniel Coca, István Bogdán, and Robert J. Beynon 7.1 Introduction 169 7.2 Protein Identifi cation by Sequence Database Searching Using MS/MS Data 171 7.3 Reconfi gurable Computing Platform 174 7.4 FPGA Implementation of the MS/MS Search Engine 176 7.5 Summary 180 8 Real-Time Confi gurable Phase-Coherent Pipelines 185 Robert L. Shuler, Jr., and David K. Rutishauser 8.1 Introduction and Purpose 185 8.2 History and Related Methods 188 8.3 Implementation Framework 191 8.4 Prototype Implementation 204 8.5 Assessment Compared with Related Methods 207 9 Low Overhead Radiation Hardening Techniques for Embedded Architectures 211 Sohan Purohit, Sai Rahul Chalamalasetti, and Martin Margala 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Recently Proposed SEU Tolerance Techniques 213 9.3 Radiation-Hardened Reconfi gurable Array with Instruction Rollback 223 9.4 Conclusion 234 10 Hybrid Partially Adaptive Fault-Tolerant Routing for 3D Networks-on-Chip 239 Sudeep Pasricha and Yong Zou 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 Related Work 240 10.3 Proposed 4NP-First Routing Scheme 242 10.4 Experiments 250 10.5 Conclusion 255 11 Interoperability in Electronic Systems 259 Andrew Leone 11.1 Interoperability 259 11.2 The Basis for Interoperability: The OSI Model 261 11.3 Hardware 263 11.4 Firmware 266 11.5 Partitioning the System 268 11.6 Examples of Interoperable Systems 270 12 Software Modeling Approaches for Presilicon System Performance Analysis 273 Kenneth J. Schultz and Frederic Risacher 12.1 Introduction 273 12.2 Methodologies 275 12.3 Results 283 12.4 Conclusion 288 13 Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Implementation in Embedded Systems 291 Issam Hammad, Kamal El-Sankary, and Ezz El-Masry 13.1 Introduction 291 13.2 Finite Field 292 13.3 The AES 293 13.4 Hardware Implementations for AES 300 13.5 High-Speed AES Encryptor with Efficient Merging Techniques 306 13.6 Conclusion 315 14 Reconfi gurable Architecture for Cryptography over Binary Finite Fields 319 Samuel Antão, Ricardo Chaves, and Leonel Sousa 14.1 Introduction 319 14.2 Background 320 14.3 Reconfigurable Processor 333 14.4 Results 350 14.5 Conclusions 358 References 359 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe simulation of electromagnetic transients is a mature field that plays an important role in the design of modern power systems. Since the first steps in this field to date, a significant effort has been dedicated to the development of new techniques and more powerful software tools.Table of ContentsPreface xv About the Editor xvii List of Contributors xix 1 Introduction to Electromagnetic Transient Analysis of Power Systems 1 Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Scope of the Book 4 References 6 2 Solution Techniques for Electromagnetic Transients in Power Systems 9 Jean Mahseredjian, Ilhan Kocar and Ulas Karaagac 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Application Field for the Computation of Electromagnetic Transients 10 2.3 The Main Modules 11 2.4 Graphical User Interface 11 2.5 Formulation of Network Equations for Steady-State and Time-Domain Solutions 12 2.5.1 Nodal Analysis and Modified-Augmented-Nodal-Analysis 13 2.5.2 State-Space Analysis 20 2.5.3 Hybrid Analysis 21 2.5.4 State-Space Groups and MANA 25 2.5.5 Integration Time-Step 27 2.6 Control Systems 28 2.7 Multiphase Load-Flow Solution and Initialization 29 2.7.1 Load-Flow Constraints 31 2.7.2 Initialization of Load-Flow Equations 33 2.7.3 Initialization from Steady-State Solution 33 2.8 Implementation 34 2.9 Conclusions 36 References 36 3 Frequency Domain Aspects of Electromagnetic Transient Analysis of Power Systems 39 José L. Naredo, Jean Mahseredjian, Ilhan Kocar, JoséA.Gutiérrez–Robles and Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Frequency Domain Basics 40 3.2.1 Phasors and FD Representation of Signals 40 3.2.2 Fourier Series 43 3.2.3 Fourier Transform 46 3.3 Discrete-Time Frequency Analysis 48 3.3.1 Aliasing Effect 50 3.3.2 Sampling Theorem 51 3.3.3 Conservation of Information and the DFT 53 3.3.4 Fast Fourier Transform 54 3.4 Frequency-Domain Transient Analysis 56 3.4.1 Fourier Transforms and Transients 56 3.4.2 Fourier and Laplace Transforms 62 3.4.3 The Numerical Laplace Transform 63 3.4.4 Application Examples with the NLT 65 3.4.5 Brief History of NLT Development 65 3.5 Multirate Transient Analysis 66 3.6 Conclusions 69 Acknowledgement 70 References 70 4 Real-Time Simulation Technologies in Engineering 72 Christian Dufour and Jean Bélanger 4.1 Introduction 72 4.2 Model-Based Design and Real-Time Simulation 73 4.3 General Considerations about Real-Time Simulation 74 4.3.1 The Constraint of Real-Time 74 4.3.2 Stiffness Issues 75 4.3.3 Simulator Bandwidth Considerations 75 4.3.4 Simulation Bandwidth vs. Applications 75 4.3.5 Achieving Very Low Latency for HIL Application 76 4.3.6 Effective Parallel Processing for Fast EMT Simulation 77 4.3.7 FPGA-Based Multirate Simulators 79 4.3.8 Advanced Parallel Solvers without Artificial Delays or Stublines: Application to Active Distribution Networks 79 4.3.9 The Need for Iterations in Real-Time 80 4.4 Phasor-Mode Real-Time Simulation 82 4.5 Modern Real-Time Simulator Requirements 82 4.5.1 Simulator I/O Requirements 83 4.6 Rapid Control Prototyping and Hardware-in-the-Loop Testing 85 4.7 Power Grid Real-Time Simulation Applications 85 4.7.1 Statistical Protection System Study 85 4.7.2 Monte Carlo Tests for Power Grid Switching Surge System Studies 87 4.7.3 Modular Multilevel Converter in HVDC Applications 88 4.7.4 High-End Super-Large Power Grid Simulations 89 4.8 Motor Drive and FPGA-Based Real-Time Simulation Applications 90 4.8.1 Industrial Motor Drive Design and Testing Using CPU Models 90 4.8.2 FPGA Modelling of SRM and PMSM Motor Drives 91 4.9 Educational System: RPC-Based Study of DFIM Wind Turbine 94 4.10 Mechatronic Real-Time Simulation Applications 95 4.10.1 Aircraft Flight Training Simulator 95 4.10.2 Aircraft Flight Parameter Identification 95 4.10.3 International Space Station Robotic Arm Testing 95 4.11 Conclusion 97 References 97 5 Calculation of Power System Overvoltages 100 Juan A. Martinez-Velasco and Francisco González-Molina 5.1 Introduction 100 5.2 Power System Overvoltages 101 5.2.1 Temporary Overvoltages 101 5.2.2 Slow-Front Overvoltages 102 5.2.3 Fast-Front Overvoltages 102 5.2.4 Very-Fast-Front Overvoltages 103 5.3 Temporary Overvoltages 103 5.3.1 Introduction 103 5.3.2 Modelling Guidelines for Temporary Overvoltages 103 5.3.3 Faults to Grounds 104 5.3.4 Load Rejection 110 5.3.5 Harmonic Resonance 115 5.3.6 Energization of Unloaded Transformers 120 5.3.7 Ferroresonance 125 5.3.8 Conclusions 133 5.4 Switching Overvoltages 135 5.4.1 Introduction 135 5.4.2 Modelling Guidelines 135 5.4.3 Switching Overvoltages 139 5.4.4 Case Studies 149 5.4.5 Validation 154 5.5 Lightning Overvoltages 154 5.5.1 Introduction 154 5.5.2 Modelling Guidelines 155 5.5.3 Case Studies 163 5.5.4 Validation 172 5.6 Very Fast Transient Overvoltages in Gas Insulated Substations 174 5.6.1 Introduction 174 5.6.2 Origin of VFTO in GIS 174 5.6.3 Propagation of VFTs in GISs 176 5.6.4 Modelling Guidelines 180 5.6.5 Case Study 9: VFT in a 765 kV GIS 182 5.6.6 Statistical Calculation 183 5.6.7 Validation 185 5.7 Conclusions 187 Acknowledgement 187 References 187 6 Analysis of FACTS Controllers and their Transient Modelling Techniques 195 Kalyan K. Sen 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Theory of Power Flow Control 199 6.3 Modelling Guidelines 206 6.3.1 Representation of a Power System 206 6.3.2 Representation of System Control 206 6.3.3 Representation of a Controlled Switch 209 6.3.4 Simulation Errors and Control 210 6.4 Modelling of FACTS Controllers 210 6.4.1 Simulation of an Independent PFC in a Single Line Application 212 6.4.2 Simulation of a Voltage Regulating Transformer 212 6.4.3 Simulation of a Phase Angle Regulator 214 6.4.4 Simulation of a Unified Power Flow Controller 215 6.5 Simulation Results of a UPFC 230 6.6 Simulation Results of an ST 238 6.7 Conclusion 245 Acknowledgement 245 References 245 7 Applications of Power Electronic Devices in Distribution Systems 248 Arindam Ghosh and Farhad Shahnia 7.1 Introduction 248 7.2 Modelling of Converter and Filter Structures for CPDs 250 7.2.1 Three-Phase Converter Structures 250 7.2.2 Filter Structures 251 7.2.3 Dynamic Simulation of CPDs 252 7.3 Distribution Static Compensator (DSTATCOM) 253 7.3.1 Current Control Using DSTATCOM 253 7.3.2 Voltage Control Using DSTATCOM 256 7.4 Dynamic Voltage Restorer (DVR) 258 7.5 Unified Power Quality Conditioner (UPQC) 263 7.6 Voltage Balancing Using DSTATCOM and DVR 267 7.7 Excess Power Circulation Using CPDs 271 7.7.1 Current-Controlled DSTATCOM Application 271 7.7.2 Voltage-Controlled DSTATCOM Application 272 7.7.3 UPQC Application 276 7.8 Conclusions 278 References 278 8 Modelling of Electronically Interfaced DER Systems for Transient Analysis 280 Amirnaser Yazdani and Omid Alizadeh 8.1 Introduction 280 8.2 Generic Electronically Interfaced DER System 281 8.3 Realization of Different DER Systems 283 8.3.1 PV Energy Systems 283 8.3.2 Fuel-Cell Systems 284 8.3.3 Battery Energy Storage Systems 284 8.3.4 Supercapacitor Energy Storage System 285 8.3.5 Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage System 285 8.3.6 Wind Energy Systems 286 8.3.7 Flywheel Energy Storage Systems 287 8.4 Transient Analysis of Electronically Interfaced DER Systems 287 8.5 Examples 288 8.5.1 Example 1: Single-Stage PV Energy System 288 8.5.2 Example 2: Direct-Drive Variable-Speed Wind Energy System 298 8.6 Conclusion 315 References 315 9 Simulation of Transients for VSC-HVDC Transmission Systems Based on Modular Multilevel Converters 317 Hani Saad, Sébastien Dennetière, Jean Mahseredjian, Tarek Ould-Bachir and Jean-Pierre David 9.1 Introduction 317 9.2 mmc Topology 318 9.3 mmc Models 320 9.3.1 Model 1 – Full Detailed 320 9.3.2 Model 2 – Detailed Equivalent 321 9.3.3 Model 3 – Switching Function of MMC Arm 322 9.3.4 Model 4 – AVM Based on Power Frequency 325 9.4 Control System 327 9.4.1 Operation Principle 327 9.4.2 Upper-Level Control 328 9.4.3 Lower-Level Control 333 9.4.4 Control Structure Requirement Depending on MMC Model Type 336 9.5 Model Comparisons 336 9.5.1 Step Change on Active Power Reference 337 9.5.2 Three-Phase AC Fault 337 9.5.3 Influence of MMC Levels 338 9.5.4 Pole-to-Pole DC Fault 338 9.5.5 Startup Sequence 340 9.5.6 Computational Performance 340 9.6 Real-Time Simulation of MMC Using CPU and FPGA 342 9.6.1 Relation between Sampling Time and N 344 9.6.2 Optimization of Model 2 for Real-Time Simulation 345 9.6.3 Real-Time Simulation Setup 346 9.6.4 CPU-Based Model 347 9.6.5 FPGA-Based Model 350 9.7 Conclusions 356 References 357 10 Dynamic Average Modelling of Rectifier Loads and AC-DC Converters for Power System Applications 360 Sina Chiniforoosh, Juri Jatskevich, Hamid Atighechi and Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 10.1 Introduction 360 10.2 Front-End Diode Rectifier System Configurations 361 10.3 Detailed Analysis and Modes of Operation 365 10.4 Dynamic Average Modelling 368 10.4.1 Selected Dynamic AVMs 370 10.4.2 Computer Implementation 372 10.5 Verification and Comparison of the AVMs 372 10.5.1 Steady-State Characteristics 372 10.5.2 Model Dynamic Order and Eigenvalue Analysis 376 10.5.3 Dynamic Performance Under Balanced and Unbalanced Conditions 377 10.5.4 Input Sequence Impedances under Unbalanced Conditions 382 10.5.5 Small-Signal Input/Output Impedances 383 10.6 Generalization to High-Pulse-Count Converters 386 10.6.1 Detailed Analysis 387 10.6.2 Dynamic Average Modelling 388 10.7 Generalization to PWM AC-DC Converters 391 10.7.1 PWM Voltage-Source Converters 391 10.7.2 Dynamic Average-Value Modelling of PWM Voltage-Source Converters 392 10.8 Conclusions 394 Appendix 394 References 395 11 Protection Systems 398 Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 11.1 Introduction 398 11.2 Modelling Guidelines for Power System Components 400 11.2.1 Line Models 400 11.2.2 Insulated Cables 401 11.2.3 Source Models 401 11.2.4 Transformer Models 401 11.2.5 Circuit Breaker Models 403 11.3 Models of Instrument Transformers 403 11.3.1 Introduction 403 11.3.2 Current Transformers 404 11.3.3 Rogowski Coils 408 11.3.4 Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformers 410 11.3.5 Voltage Transformers 412 11.4 Relay Modelling 412 11.4.1 Introduction 412 11.4.2 Classification of Relay Models 412 11.4.3 Relay Models 413 11.5 Implementation of Relay Models 418 11.5.1 Introduction 418 11.5.2 Sources of Information for Building Relay Models 419 11.5.3 Software Tools 420 11.5.4 Implementation of Relay Models 421 11.5.5 Interfacing Relay Models to Recorded Data 422 11.5.6 Applications of Relay Models 423 11.5.7 Limitations of Relay Models 424 11.6 Validation of Relay Models 424 11.6.1 Validation Procedures 424 11.6.2 Relay Model Testing Procedures 425 11.6.3 Accuracy Assessment 426 11.6.4 Relay Testing Facilities 426 11.7 Case Studies 427 11.7.1 Introduction 427 11.7.2 Case Study 1: Simulation of an Electromechanical Distance Relay 428 11.7.3 Case Study 2: Simulation of a Numerical Distance Relay 430 11.8 Protection of Distribution Systems 450 11.8.1 Introduction 450 11.8.2 Protection of Distribution Systems with Distributed Generation 451 11.8.3 Modelling of Distribution Feeder Protective Devices 451 11.8.4 Protection of the Interconnection of Distributed Generators 460 11.8.5 Case Study 3 460 11.8.6 Case Study 4 465 11.9 Conclusions 471 Acknowledgement 475 References 476 12 Time-Domain Analysis of the Smart Grid Technologies: Possibilities and Challenges 481 Francisco de León, Reynaldo Salcedo, Xuanchang Ran and Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 12.1 Introduction 481 12.2 Distribution Systems 482 12.2.1 Radial Distribution Systems 483 12.2.2 Networked Distribution Systems 484 12.3 Restoration and Reconfiguration of the Smart Grid 487 12.3.1 Introduction 487 12.3.2 Heavily Meshed Networked Distribution Systems 487 12.4 Integration of Distributed Generation 498 12.4.1 Scope 498 12.4.2 Radial Distribution Systems 499 12.4.3 Heavily Meshed Networked Distribution Systems 503 12.5 Overvoltages in Distribution Networks 515 12.5.1 Introduction 515 12.5.2 Ferroresonant Overvoltages 516 12.5.3 Long-Duration Overvoltages due to Backfeeding 519 12.6 Development of Data Translators for Interfacing Power-Flow Programs with EMTP-Type Programs 529 12.6.1 Introduction 529 12.6.2 Power-Flow to EMTP-RV Translator 530 12.6.3 Example of the Translation of a Transmission Line 533 12.6.4 Challenges of Development 533 12.6.5 Model Validation 535 12.6.6 Recommendations 542 Acknowledgement 546 References 546 13 Interfacing Methods for Electromagnetic Transient Simulation: New Possibilities for Analysis and Design 552 Shaahin Filizadeh 13.1 Introduction 552 13.2 Need for Interfacing 553 13.3 Interfacing Templates 554 13.3.1 Static Interfacing 554 13.3.2 Dynamic Interfacing and Memory Management 555 13.3.3 Wrapper Interfaces 555 13.4 Interfacing Implementation Options: External vs Internal Interfaces 555 13.4.1 External Interfaces 556 13.4.2 Internal Interfaces 556 13.5 Multiple Interfacing 556 13.5.1 Core-Type Interfacing 557 13.5.2 Chain-Type Interfacing 557 13.5.3 Loop Interfacing 558 13.6 Examples of Interfacing 558 13.6.1 Interfacing to Matlab/Simulink 558 13.6.2 Wrapper Interfacing: Run-Controllers and Multiple-Runs 560 13.7 Design Process Using EMT Simulation Tools 560 13.7.1 Parameter Selection Techniques 561 13.7.2 Uncertainty Analysis 563 13.8 Conclusions 566 References 566 Annex A: Techniques and Computer Codes for Rational Modelling of Frequency-Dependent Components and Subnetworks 568 Bjørn Gustavsen A. 1 Introduction 568 A. 2 Rational Functions 569 A. 3 Time-Domain Simulation 569 A. 4 Fitting Techniques 569 A.4. 1 Polynomial Fitting 569 A.4. 2 Bode’s Asymptotic Fitting 570 A.4. 3 Vector Fitting 570 A. 5 Passivity 571 A. 6 Matrix Fitting Toolbox 572 A.6. 1 General 572 A.6. 2 Overview 572 A. 7 Example A.1: Electrical Circuit 573 A. 8 Example 6.2: High-Frequency Transformer Modelling 575 A.8. 1 Measurement 575 A.8. 2 Rational Approximation 575 A.8. 3 Passivity Enforcement 575 A.8. 4 Time-Domain Simulation 576 A.8. 5 Comparison with Time-Domain Measurement 577 References 579 Annex B: Dynamic System Equivalents 581 Udaya D. Annakkage B. 1 Introduction 581 B. 2 High-Frequency Equivalents 582 B.2. 1 Introduction 582 B. 2 Frequency-Dependent Network Equivalent (FDNE) 582 B.2. 3 Examples of High-Frequency FDNE 583 B.2. 4 Two-Layer Network Equivalent (TLNE) 586 B.2. 5 Modified Two-Layer Network Equivalent 592 B.2. 6 Other Methods 594 B.2. 7 Numerical Issues 594 B. 3 Low-Frequency Equivalents 595 B.3. 1 Introduction 595 B.3. 2 Modal Methods 596 B. 3 Coherency Methods 596 B.3. 4 Measurement or Simulation-Based Methods 597 B. 4 Wideband Equivalents 597 B. 5 Conclusions 597 References 598 Index 601

Read more less

Book SynopsisUltra-capacitors, used as short-term energy storage devices, are growing in popularity especially in the transportation and renewable energy sectors. This text provides an up-to-date and comprehensive analysis of ultra-capacitor theory, modeling and module design from an application perspective, focusing on the practical aspects of power conversion and ultra-capacitor integration with power electronics systems. Key features: clearly explains the theoretical and practical aspects of ultra-capacitor, analysis, modelling and design describes different power conversion applications such as variable speed drives, renewable energy systems, traction, power quality, diesel electric hybrid applications provides detailed guidelines for the design and selection of ultra-capacitor modules and interface dc-dc converters includes end-of-chapter exercises and design examples This is an essential reference for power electronics engTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Energy Storage Technologies and Devices 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Direct Electrical Energy Storage Devices 3 1.3 Indirect Electrical Energy Storage Technologies and Devices 11 1.4 Applications and Comparison 19 2 Ultra-Capacitor Energy Storage Devices 22 2.1 Background of Ultra-Capacitors 22 2.2 Electric Double-Layer Capacitors—EDLC 24 2.3 The Ultra-Capacitor Macro (Electric Circuit) Model 27 2.4 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Energy and Power 42 2.5 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Charge/Discharge Methods 47 2.6 Frequency Related Losses 59 2.7 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Thermal Aspects 65 2.8 Ultra-Capacitor High Power Modules 72 2.9 Ultra-Capacitor Trends and Future Development 74 2.10 Summary 76 3 Power Conversion and Energy Storage Applications 78 3.1 Fundamentals of Static Power Converters 78 3.2 Interest in Power Conversion with Energy Storage 84 3.3 Controlled Electric Drive Applications 90 3.4 Renewable Energy Source Applications 102 3.5 Autonomous Power Generators and Applications 113 3.6 Energy Transmission and Distribution Applications 121 3.7 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Applications 128 3.8 Electric Traction Applications 131 3.9 Summary 145 4 Ultra-Capacitor Module Selection and Design 149 4.1 Introduction 149 4.2 The Module Voltage Rating and Voltage Level Selection 152 4.3 The Capacitance Determination 164 4.4 Ultra-Capacitor Module Design 173 4.5 The Module's Thermal Management 189 4.6 Ultra-Capacitor Module Testing 207 4.7 Summary 214 5 Interface DC–DC Converters 216 5.1 Introduction 216 5.2 Background and Classification of Interface DC–DC Converters 216 5.3 State-of-the-Art Interface DC–DC Converters 223 5.4 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Current and Voltage Definition 229 5.5 Multi-Cell Interleaved DC–DC Converters 231 5.6 Design of a Two-Level N-Cell Interleaved DC–DC Converter 254 5.7 Conversion Power Losses: A General Case Analysis 295 5.8 Power Converter Thermal Management: A General Case Analysis 299 5.9 Summary 313 References 314 Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers instantaneous power theory as well as the importance of design of shunt, series, and combined shunt-series power active filters and hybrid passive-active power filters Illustrates pioneering applications of the p-q theory to power conditioning, which highlights distinct differences from conventional theories Explores p-q-r theory to give a new method of analyzing the different powers in a three-phase circuit Provides exercises at the end of many chapters that are unique to the second edition Table of ContentsPREFACE xiii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Concepts and Evolution of Electric Power Theory 1 1.2 Applications of the P-q Theory to Power Electronics Equipment 4 1.3 Harmonic Voltages in Power Systems 5 1.4 Identified and Unidentified Harmonic-Producing Loads 6 1.5 Harmonic Current and Voltage Sources 8 1.6 Basic Principles of Harmonic Compensation 9 1.7 Basic Principle of Power Flow Control 13 References 15 CHAPTER 2 ELECTRIC POWER DEFINITIONS: BACKGROUND 17 2.1 Power Definitions Under Sinusoidal Conditions 18 2.2 Voltage and Current Phasors and Complex Impedance 20 2.3 Complex Power and Power Factor 21 2.4 Concepts of Power Under Nonsinusoidal Conditions: Conventional Approaches 22 2.4.1 Power Definitions by Budeanu 22 2.4.1.A Power Tetrahedron and Distortion Factor 25 2.4.2 Power Definitions by Fryze 27 2.5 Electric Power in Three-Phase Systems 28 2.5.1 Classifications of Three-Phase Systems 28 2.5.2 Power in Balanced Three-Phase Systems 31 2.5.3 Power in Three-Phase Unbalanced Systems 33 2.6 Summary 34 2.7 Exercises 34 References 35 CHAPTER 3 THE INSTANTANEOUS POWER THEORY 37 3.1 Basis of the p-q Theory 37 3.1.1 Historical Background of the p-q Theory 38 3.1.2 The Clarke Transformation 39 3.1.2.A Calculation of Voltage and Current Vectors When Zero-Sequence Components Are Excluded 41 3.1.3 Three-Phase Instantaneous Active Power in Terms of Clarke Components 43 3.1.4 The Instantaneous Powers of the p-q Theory 44 3.2 The p-q Theory in Three-Phase, Three-Wire Systems 44 3.2.1 Comparisons with the Conventional Theory 48 3.2.1.A Example #1—Sinusoidal Voltages and Currents 49 3.2.1.B Example #2—Balanced Voltages and Capacitive Loads 49 3.2.1.C Example #3—Sinusoidal Balanced Voltage and Nonlinear Load 50 3.2.2 Use of the p-q Theory for Shunt Current Compensation 54 3.2.2.A Examples of Appearance of Hidden Currents 59 3.2.3 The Dual p-q Theory 63 3.3 The p-q Theory in Three-Phase, Four-Wire Systems 65 3.3.1 The Zero-Sequence Power in a Three-Phase Sinusoidal Voltage Source 67 3.3.2 Presence of Negative-Sequence Components 68 3.3.3 General Case Including Distortions and Imbalances in the Voltages and in the Currents 69 3.3.4 Physical Meanings of the Instantaneous Real, Imaginary, and Zero-Sequence Powers 74 3.3.5 Avoiding the Clarke Transformation in the p-q Theory 75 3.3.6 Modified p-q Theory 77 3.4 Instantaneous abc Theory 81 3.4.1 Active and Nonactive Current Calculation by Means of a Minimization Method 83 3.4.2 Generalized Fryze Currents Minimization Method 88 3.5 Comparisons Between the p-q Theory and the abc Theory 91 3.5.1 Selection of Power Components to be Compensated 95 3.6 The p-q-r Theory 97 3.7 Summary 104 3.8 Exercises 105 References 106 CHAPTER 4 SHUNT ACTIVE FILTERS 111 4.1 General Description of Shunt Active Filters 113 4.1.1 PWM Converters for Shunt Active Filters 114 4.1.2 Active Filter Controllers 115 4.2 Three-Phase, Three-Wire Shunt Active Filters 118 4.2.1 Active Filters for Constant Power Compensation 119 4.2.2 Active Filters for Sinusoidal Current Control 135 4.2.2.A Positive-Sequence Voltage Detector 138 4.2.2.B Simulation Results 145 4.2.3 Active Filters for Current Minimization 145 4.2.4 Active Filters for Harmonic Damping 149 4.2.4.A Shunt Active Filter Based on Voltage Detection 151 4.2.4.B Active Filter Controller Based on Voltage Detection 152 4.2.4.C An Application Case of an Active Filter for Harmonic Damping 156 4.2.5 A Digital Controller 171 4.2.5.A System Configuration of the Digital Controller 172 4.2.5.B Current Control Methods 177 4.3 Three-Phase, Four-Wire Shunt Active Filters 180 4.3.1 Converter Topologies for Three-Phase, Four-Wire Systems 181 4.3.2 Dynamic Hysteresis-Band Current Controller 182 4.3.3 Active Filter dc Voltage Regulator 184 4.3.4 Optimal Power Flow Conditions 185 4.3.5 Constant Instantaneous Power Control Strategy 187 4.3.6 Sinusoidal Current Control Strategy 189 4.3.7 Performance Analysis and Parameter Optimization 192 4.3.7.A Influence of the System Parameters 192 4.3.7.B Dynamic Response of the Shunt Active Filter 193 4.3.7.C Economical Aspects 198 4.3.7.D Experimental Results 199 4.4 Compensation Methods Based on the p-q-r Theory 204 4.4.1 Reference Power Control Method 206 4.4.2 Reference Current Control Method 211 4.4.3 Alternative Control Method 213 4.4.4 The Simplified Sinusoidal Source Current Strategy 215 4.4.4.A The PLL Circuit and the Positive-Sequence Detector 215 4.4.4.B The Sinusoidal Source Current Control Strategy with Energy Balance Inside the Active Filter 217 4.5 Comparisons Between Control Methods Based on the p-q Theory and the p-q-r Theory 218 4.6 Shunt Selective Harmonic Compensation 224 4.7 Summary 231 4.8 Exercises 231 References 233 CHAPTER 5 HYBRID AND SERIES ACTIVE FILTERS 237 5.1 Basic Series Active Filter 237 5.2 Combined Series Active Filter and Shunt Passive Filter 239 5.2.1 Example of an Experimental System 242 5.2.1.A Compensation Principle 243 5.2.1.B Filtering Characteristics 245 5.2.1.C Control Circuit 246 5.2.1.D Filter to Suppress Switching Ripples 248 5.2.1.E Experimental Results 249 5.2.2 Some Remarks about the Hybrid Filters 252 5.3 Series Active Filter Integrated with a Double-Series Diode Rectifier 253 5.3.1 The First-Generation Control Circuit 255 5.3.1.A Circuit Configuration and Delay Time 255 5.3.1.B Stability of the Active Filter 257 5.3.2 The Second-Generation Control Circuit 258 5.3.3 Stability Analysis and Characteristics Comparison 260 5.3.3.A Transfer Function of the Control Circuits 260 5.3.3.B Characteristics Comparisons 261 5.3.4 Design of a Switching-Ripple Filter 263 5.3.4.A Design Principle 263 5.3.4.B Effect on the System Stability 263 5.3.4.C Experimental Testing 264 5.3.5 Experimental Results 266 5.4 Comparisons Between Hybrid and Pure Active Filters 268 5.4.1 Low-Voltage Transformerless Hybrid Active Filter 268 5.4.2 Low-Voltage, Transformerless, Pure Shunt Active Filter 271 5.4.3 Comparisons through Simulation Results 273 5.5 Hybrid Active Filters for Medium-Voltage Motor Drives 274 5.5.1 Hybrid Active Filter for a Three-Phase Six-Pulse Diode Rectifier 275 5.5.1.A System Configuration 275 5.5.1.B Experimental System 277 5.5.1.C Control System 277 5.5.1.D Common Sixth-Harmonic Zero-Sequence Voltage Injection 281 5.5.1.E Three-Phase Second-Harmonic Negative Sequence Voltages Injection 283 5.5.1.F Experimental Results 286 5.5.1.G Appendix 292 5.5.2 Hybrid Active Filter for a Three-Phase 12-Pulse Diode Rectifier 292 5.5.2.A Medium-Voltage High-Power Motor Drive Systems 293 5.5.2.B Experimental System 295 5.5.2.C Control System 298 5.5.2.D Three-Phase Second-Harmonic Negative Sequence Voltages Injection 300 5.5.2.E Experimental Results 303 5.5.2.F Overall System Efficiency 308 5.6 Summary 308 5.7 Exercises 309 References 310 CHAPTER 6 COMBINED SERIES AND SHUNT POWER CONDITIONERS 313 6.1 The Unified Power Flow Controller 314 6.1.1 FACTS and UPFC Principles 315 6.1.1.A Voltage Regulation Principle 317 6.1.1.B Power Flow Control Principle 318 6.1.2 A Controller Design for the UPFC 321 6.1.3 UPFC Approach Using a Shunt Multipulse Converter 328 6.1.3.A Six-Pulse Converter 328 6.1.3.B Quasi 24-Pulse Converter 332 6.1.3.C Control of Active and Reactive Power in Multipulse Converters 334 6.1.3.D Shunt Multipulse Converter Controller 336 6.2 The Unified Power Quality Conditioner 339 6.2.1 General Description of the UPQC 340 6.2.2 A Three-Phase, Four-Wire UPQC 342 6.2.2.A Power Circuit of the UPQC 343 6.2.2.B The UPQC Controller 344 6.2.2.C Analysis of the UPQC Dynamic 353 6.2.3 The UPQC Combined with Passive Filters (the Hybrid UPQC) 370 6.2.3.A Controller of the Hybrid UPQC 374 6.2.3.B Experimental Results 380 6.3 The Universal Active Power Line Conditioner 386 6.3.1 General Description of the UPLC 386 6.3.2 The Controller of the UPLC 389 6.3.2.A Controller for Configuration #2 of the UPLC 396 6.3.3 Performance of the UPLC 397 6.3.3.A Normalized System Parameters 397 6.3.3.B Simulation Results of Configuration #1 of the UPLC 401 6.3.3.C Simulation Results of Configuration #2 of the UPLC 409 6.3.4 General Aspects 411 6.4 Combined Shunt-Series Filters for AC and DC Sides of Three-Phase Rectifiers 411 6.4.1 The Combined Shunt-Series Filter 414 6.4.2 Instantaneous Real and Imaginary Powers in the ac Source 415 6.4.3 The Instantaneous Power in the dc Side of the Rectifier 416 6.4.4 Comparison of Instantaneous Powers on the ac and dc Sides of the Rectifier 418 6.4.5 Control Algorithm of the Active Shunt-Series Filter 418 6.4.6 The Common dc Link 421 6.4.7 Digital Simulation 424 6.4.8 Experimental Results 426 6.5 Summary 427 6.6 Exercises 428 References 429 INDEX 431

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystemic thinking is the process of understanding how systems influence one another within a world of systems and has been defined as an approach to problem solving by viewing problems as parts of an overall system, rather than reacting to a specific part, outcome, or event. This book provides a complete overview of systemic thinking, exploring a framework and graphical technique for understanding and identifying new ways to more efficiently solve problems and create solutions. Demystifying the conjunction of systems concepts and systemic diagramming techniques, this comprehensive pocket guide introduces and explains the basis of systemigrams, how to create a systemigram and a SystemiShow, illuminates multiple complex problems, and provides an overview of what purpose they serve for today''s industry professionals. Systemic Thinking: Building Maps for Worlds of Systems: Includes illustrative systemigrams and case studies Includes the SystemTable of ContentsLIST OF SYSTEMIGRAMS ix LIST OF FIGURES xiii LIST OF TABLES xv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii JOURNEY I SYSTEMIC FAILURE 1 1 WHERE WE START FROM 3 2 SYSTEMIC INTRODUCTION 6 3 RAINING ON MY CASCADE 11 4 IT’S THE WHOLE, STUPID! 16 5 THE ANSWER IS . . . PIONEER ACORN PANCAKES? 23 JOURNEY II SYSTEMIC IDEAS: THE CONCEPTAGON 29 6 FRAMEWORKS 31 7 THE CONCEPTAGON 35 8 BOUNDARIES, INTERIORS, AND EXTERIORS 38 9 PARTS, RELATIONSHIPS, AND WHOLES 46 10 INPUTS, OUTPUTS, AND TRANSFORMATIONS 57 11 CONTROL, COMMAND, AND COMMUNICATION 62 12 STRUCTURE, PROCESS, AND FUNCTION 76 13 VARIETY, PARSIMONY, AND HARMONY 86 14 OPENNESS, HIERARCHY, AND EMERGENCE 93 JOURNEY III SYSTEMIC MAPS: SYSTEMIGRAMS 99 15 WHAT . . . ? 101 16 WHY . . . ? 120 17 WHEN . . . ? 140 18 HOW . . . ? 158 19 WHO . . . ? 183 20 WHERE . . . ? 204 21 TO ARRIVE WHERE WE STARTED 233 REFERENCES 236 INDEX 238

Read more less

Book SynopsisSwitching in Electrical Transmission and Distribution Systems presents the issues and technological solutions associated with switching in power systems, from medium to ultra-high voltage.Trade Review“Engineers who design and perform testing of MV and HV circuit breakers, load break switches, or fuses as well as MV and HV test lab managers will find this book to be a very useful and handy reference.” (IEEE Electrical Engineering magazine, 1 July 2015) Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Switching in Power Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Organization of this Book 2 1.3 Power-System Analysis 5 1.4 Purpose of Switching 8 1.4.1 Isolation and Earthing 8 1.4.2 Busbar-Transfer Switching 8 1.4.3 Load Switching 8 1.4.4 Fault-Current Interruption 9 1.5 The Switching Arc 10 1.6 Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) 14 1.6.1 TRV Description 14 1.6.2 TRV Composed of Load- and Source-Side Contributions 16 1.7 Switching Devices 19 1.8 Classification of Circuit-Breakers 22 References 27 2 Faults in Power Systems 28 2.1 Introduction 28 2.2 Asymmetrical Current 30 2.2.1 General Terms 30 2.2.2 DC Time Constant 33 2.2.3 Asymmetrical Current in Three-Phase Systems 34 2.3 Short-Circuit Current Impact on System and Components 35 2.4 Fault Statistics 43 2.4.1 Occurrence and Nature of Short-Circuits 43 2.4.2 Magnitude of Short-Circuit Current 45 References 46 3 Fault-Current Breaking and Making 48 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Fault-Current Interruption 48 3.3 Terminal Faults 49 3.3.1 Introduction 49 3.3.2 Three-Phase Current Interruption 51 3.4 Transformer-Limited Faults 58 3.4.1 Transformer Modelling for TRV Calculation 59 3.4.2 External Capacitances 61 3.5 Reactor-Limited Faults 62 3.6 Faults on Overhead Lines 64 3.6.1 Short-Line Faults 64 3.6.2 Long-Line Faults 81 3.7 Out-of-Phase Switching 81 3.7.1 Introduction 81 3.7.2 Switching between Generator and System 83 3.7.3 Switching between Two Systems 85 3.8 Fault-Current Making 86 3.8.1 Impact of Making a Short-Circuit Current on the Circuit-Breaker 86 3.8.2 Switching-Voltage Transients at Making in Three-Phase Systems 88 References 93 4 Load Switching 96 4.1 Normal-Load Switching 96 4.2 Capacitive-Load Switching 97 4.2.1 Introduction 97 4.2.2 Single-Phase Capacitive-Load Switching 98 4.2.3 Three-Phase Capacitive-Load Switching 104 4.2.4 Late Breakdown Phenomena 104 4.2.5 Overhead-Line Switching 114 4.2.6 Capacitor-Bank Energization 118 4.3 Inductive-Load Switching 122 4.3.1 Current Chopping 124 4.3.2 Implication of Current Chopping 125 4.3.3 Inductive-Load Switching Duties 127 References 138 5 Calculation of Switching Transients 141 5.1 Analytical Calculation 141 5.1.1 Introduction 141 5.1.2 Switching LR Circuits 142 5.1.3 Switching RLC Circuits 147 5.2 Numerical Simulation of Transients 153 5.2.1 Historical Overview 153 5.2.2 The Electromagnetic Transients Program 154 5.2.3 Overview of Electrical Programs for Transient Simulation 159 5.3 Representation of Network Elements when Calculating Transients 160 References 162 6 Current Interruption in Gaseous Media 164 6.1 Introduction 164 6.2 Air as an Interrupting Medium 166 6.2.1 General 166 6.2.2 Fault-Current Interruption by Arc Elongation 167 6.2.3 Arc Chutes 171 6.2.4 Arcs in Open Air 174 6.2.5 Current Interruption by Compressed Air 175 6.3 Oil as an Interrupting Medium 176 6.3.1 Introduction 176 6.3.2 Current Interruption in Bulk-Oil Circuit-Breakers 177 6.3.3 Current Interruption in Minimum-Oil Circuit-Breakers 180 6.4 Sulfur Hexafluoride (SF6) as an Interrupting Medium 181 6.4.1 Introduction 181 6.4.2 Physical Properties 182 6.4.3 SF6 Decomposition Products 186 6.4.4 Environmental Effects of SF6 189 6.4.5 SF6 Substitutes 195 6.5 SF6 – N2 Mixtures 197 References 198 7 Gas Circuit-Breakers 202 7.1 Oil Circuit-Breakers 202 7.2 Air Circuit-Breakers 205 7.3 SF6 Circuit-Breakers 207 7.3.1 Introduction 207 7.3.2 Double-Pressure SF6 Circuit-Breakers 210 7.3.3 Puffer-Type SF6 Circuit-Breakers 210 7.3.4 Self-Blast SF6 Circuit-Breakers 215 7.3.5 Double-Motion Principle 218 7.3.6 Double-Speed Principle 220 7.3.7 SF6 Circuit-Breakers with Magnetic Arc Rotation 221 References 222 8 Current Interruption in Vacuum 223 8.1 Introduction 223 8.2 Vacuum as an Interruption Environment 223 8.3 Vacuum Arcs 227 8.3.1 Introduction 227 8.3.2 Cathode- and Anode Sheath 229 8.3.3 The Diffuse Vacuum Arc 230 8.3.4 The Constricted Vacuum Arc 234 8.3.5 Vacuum-Arc Control by Magnetic Field 235 References 241 9 Vacuum Circuit-Breakers 243 9.1 General Features of Vacuum Interrupters 243 9.2 Contact Material for Vacuum Switchgear 246 9.2.1 Pure Metals 247 9.2.2 Alloys 247 9.3 Reliability of Vacuum Switchgear 248 9.4 Electrical Lifetime 249 9.5 Mechanical Lifetime 249 9.6 Breaking Capacity 251 9.7 Dielectric Withstand Capability 251 9.8 Current Conduction 252 9.9 Vacuum Quality 252 9.10 Vacuum Switchgear for HV Systems 253 9.10.1 Introduction 253 9.10.2 Development of HV Vacuum Circuit-Breakers 254 9.10.3 Actual Application of HV Vacuum Circuit-Breakers 255 9.10.4 X-ray Emission 256 9.10.5 Comparison of HV Vacuum- and HV SF6 Circuit-Breakers 257 References 258 10 Special Switching Situations 261 10.1 Generator-Current Breaking 261 10.1.1 Introduction 261 10.1.2 Generator Circuit-Breakers 266 10.2 Delayed Current Zero in Transmission Systems 267 10.3 Disconnector Switching 267 10.3.1 Introduction 267 10.3.2 No-Load-Current Switching 268 10.3.3 Bus-Transfer Switching 278 10.4 Earthing 279 10.4.1 Earthing Switches 279 10.4.2 High-Speed Earthing Switches 280 10.5 Switching Related to Series Capacitor Banks 282 10.5.1 Series Capacitor-Bank Protection 282 10.5.2 By-Pass Switch 283 10.6 Switching Leading to Ferroresonance 285 10.7 Fault-Current Interruption Near Shunt Capacitor Banks 286 10.8 Switching in Ultra-High-Voltage (UHV) Systems 288 10.8.1 Insulation Levels 289 10.8.2 UHV System Characteristics Related to Switching 289 10.9 High-Voltage AC Cable System Characteristics 291 10.9.1 Background 291 10.9.2 Current Situation 291 10.10 Switching in DC Systems 295 10.10.1 Introduction 295 10.10.2 Low- and Medium Voltage DC Interruption 295 10.10.3 High-Voltage DC Interruption 297 10.11 Distributed Generation and Switching Transients 298 10.11.1 General Considerations 298 10.11.2 Out-of-Phase Conditions 300 10.12 Switching with Non-Mechanical Devices 301 10.12.1 Fault-Current Limitation 301 10.12.2 Fuses 301 10.12.3 IS Limiters 303 References 304 11 Switching Overvoltages and Their Mitigation 310 11.1 Overvoltages 310 11.2 Switching Overvoltages 312 11.3 Switching-Voltage Mitigation 313 11.3.1 Principles of Mitigation 313 11.3.2 Mitigation by Closing Resistors 314 11.3.3 Mitigation by Surge Arresters 316 11.3.4 Fast Insertion of Shunt Reactors 319 11.4 Mitigation by Controlled Switching 320 11.4.1 Principles of Controlled Switching 320 11.4.2 Controlled Opening 321 11.4.3 Controlled Closing 323 11.4.4 Staggered Pole Closing 324 11.4.5 Applications of Controlled Switching 324 11.4.6 Comparison of Various Measures 334 11.4.7 Influence of Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters on Circuit-Breaker TRVs 336 11.4.8 Functional Requirements for Circuit-Breakers 337 11.4.9 Reliability Aspects 340 11.5 Practical Values of Switching Overvoltages 341 11.5.1 Overhead Lines 341 11.5.2 Shunt Capacitor Banks and Shunt Reactors 342 References 344 12 Reliability Studies of Switchgear 347 12.1 CIGRE Studies on Reliability of Switchgear 347 12.1.1 Reliability 347 12.1.2 Worldwide Surveys 348 12.1.3 Population and Failure Statistics 349 12.2 Electrical and Mechanical Endurance 354 12.2.1 Degradation Due to Arcing 354 12.2.2 Electrical-Endurance Verification 356 12.2.3 Mechanical Endurance 358 12.3 CIGRE Studies on Life Management of Circuit-Breakers 359 12.3.1 Maintenance 359 12.3.2 Monitoring and Diagnostics 360 12.3.3 Life Management of Circuit-Breakers for Frequent Load-Switching 362 12.4 Substation and System Reliability Studies 362 References 363 13 Standards, Specification, and Commissioning 365 13.1 Standards for Fault-Current Breaking Tests 365 13.1.1 Background and History of the Standardized IEC TRV Description 366 13.1.2 IEC TRV Description 368 13.1.3 IEC Test-Duties 370 13.1.4 IEC TRV Parameters Selection and Application 373 13.2 IEC Standardized Tests for Capacitive-Current Switching 373 13.3 IEC Standardized Tests for Inductive-Load Switching 377 13.3.1 Shunt-Reactor Switching 378 13.3.2 Medium-Voltage Motor Switching 381 13.4 Specification and Commissioning 381 13.4.1 General Specifications 381 13.4.2 Circuit-Breaker Specification 383 13.4.3 Information to be given with Requests for Offers 384 13.4.4 Information to be provided with Submitted Offers 384 13.4.5 Circuit-Breaker Selection 384 13.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Commissioning 384 References 385 14 Testing 386 14.1 Introduction 386 14.2 High-Power Tests 387 14.2.1 Introduction 387 14.2.2 Direct Tests 391 14.2.3 Synthetic Tests 395 References 411 List of Abbreviations 413 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisA multidisciplinary reference of engineering measurement tools, techniques, and applications?Volume 2 When you can measure what you are speaking about, and express it in numbers, you know something about it; but when you cannot measure it, when you cannot express it in numbers, your knowledge is of a meager and unsatisfactory kind; it may be the beginning of knowledge, but you have scarcely in your thoughts advanced to the stage of science. ? Lord Kelvin Measurement falls at the heart of any engineering discipline and job function. Whether engineers are attempting to state requirements quantitatively and demonstrate compliance; to track progress and predict results; or to analyze costs and benefits, they must use the right tools and techniques to produce meaningful, useful data. The Handbook of Measurement in Science and Engineering is the most comprehensive, up-to-date reference set on engineering measurements?beyond anything on the market Table of ContentsVOLUME 2 PREFACE xxiii CONTRIBUTORS xxvii PART IV MATERIALS PROPERTIES AND TESTING 945 31 Viscosity Measurement 947 Ann M. Anderson, Bradford A. Bruno, and Lilla Safford Smith 31.1 Viscosity Background, 947 31.2 Common Units of Viscosity, 949 31.3 Major Viscosity Measurement Methods, 959 31.4 ASTM Standards for Measuring Viscosity, 974 31.5 Questions to Ask When Selecting a Viscosity Measurement Technique, 976 References, 979 32 Tribology Measurements 981 Prasanta Sahoo 32.1 Introduction, 982 32.2 Measurement of Surface Roughness, 983 32.3 Measurement of Friction, 988 32.4 Measurement of Wear, 992 32.5 Measurement of Test Environment, 994 32.6 Measurement of Material Characteristics, 998 32.7 Measurement of Lubricant Characteristics, 1001 32.8 Wear Particle Analysis, 1004 32.9 Industrial Measurements, 1005 32.10 Summary, 1006 33 Corrosion Monitoring 1007 Pierre R. Roberge 33.1 What is Corrosion Monitoring?, 1007 33.2 The Role of Corrosion Monitoring, 1008 33.3 Corrosion Monitoring System Considerations, 1010 References, 1116 34 Surface Properties Measurement 1121 Mrinalini Mulukutla and Sandip P. Harimkar 34.1 Introduction, 1121 34.2 Surface Properties, 1122 34.3 Microstructural Analysis, 1125 34.4 Compositional Analysis, 1128 34.5 Phase Analysis, 1130 34.6 Mechanical Testing, 1131 34.7 Corrosion Properties, 1141 34.8 Standards for Surface Engineering Measurement, 1145 References, 1147 35 Thermal Conductivity of Engineering Materials 1151 Juergen Blumm 35.1 Introduction, 1151 35.2 Stationary Methods for Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity, 1157 35.3 Transient Methods for the Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity, 1163 35.4 Test Results on Various Engineering Materials, 1173 References, 1188 36 Optical Methods for the Measurement of Thermal Conductivity 1189 Prabhakar R. Bandaru and Max S. Aubain 36.1 Thermal Boundary Resistance May Limit Accuracy in Contact-Based Thermal Conductivity (k) Measurements, 1189 36.2 Optical Measurements of k May Avoid Contact-Related Issues, 1192 36.3 Thermoreflectance (TR), 1196 36.4 Characteristics of Thermoreflectance from Si Thin Films—Modeling and Calibration, 1199 36.5 Experimental Procedures, 1202 36.6 Results and Discussion, 1204 36.7 Summary and Outlook, 1208 Acknowledgments, 1209 References, 1209 37 Selection of Metals for Structural Design 1213 Matthew J. Donachie 37.1 Introduction, 1214 37.2 Common Alloy Systems, 1215 37.3 What are Alloys and What Affects their Use?, 1215 37.4 What are the Properties of Alloys and How are Alloys Strengthened?, 1218 37.5 Manufacture of Alloy Articles, 1221 37.6 Alloy Information, 1221 37.7 Metals at Lower Temperatures, 1231 37.8 Metals at High Temperatures, 1233 37.9 Melting and Casting Practices, 1236 37.10 Forging, Forming, Powder Metallurgy, and Joining of Alloys, 1242 37.11 Surface Protection of Materials, 1245 37.12 Postservice Refurbishment and Repair, 1248 37.13 Alloy Selection: A Look at Possibilities, 1249 37.14 Level of Property Data, 1252 37.15 Thoughts on Alloy Systems, 1252 37.16 Selected Alloy Information Sources, 1259 Further Readings, 1261 38 Mechanical Properties of Polymers 1263 Daniel Liu, Jackie Rehkopf, and Maureen Reitman 38.1 Microstructure and Morphology of Polymers—Amorphous Versus Crystalline, 1264 38.2 General Stress–Strain Behavior, 1265 38.3 Viscoelasticity, 1271 38.4 Mechanical Models of Viscoelasticity, 1272 38.5 Time–Temperature Dependence, 1274 38.6 Deformation Mechanisms, 1274 38.7 Crazing, 1277 38.8 Fracture, 1279 38.9 Modifying Mechanical Properties, 1284 38.10 Load-Bearing Applications: Creep, Fatigue Resistance, and High Strain Rate Behavior, 1285 References, 1290 39 Electrical Properties of Polymers 1291 Evaristo Riande and Ricardo Diaz-Calleja 39.1 Introductory Remarks, 1291 39.2 Polarity and Permittivity, 1292 39.3 Measurements of Dielectric Permittivity, 1293 39.4 Polarization and Dipole Moments in Isotropic Systems, 1297 39.5 Thermostimulated Depolarization Currents, 1316 39.6 Conductivity in Polyelectrolytes and Polymer-Electrolytes as Separators for Low Temperature Fuel Cells and Electrical Batteries, 1318 39.7 Semiconductors and Electronic Conducting Polymers, 1324 39.8 Ferroelectricity, Pyroelectricity, and Piezoelectricity in Polymers, 1328 39.9 Nonlinear Polarization in Polymers, 1331 39.10 Elastomers for Actuators and Sensors, 1333 39.11 Electrical Breakdown in Polymers, 1336 References, 1338 40 Nondestructive Inspection 1343 Robert L. Crane and Jeremy S. Knopp 40.1 Introduction, 1344 40.2 Liquid Penetrants, 1347 40.3 Radiography, 1351 40.4 Ultrasonic Methods, 1361 40.5 Magnetic Particle Method, 1370 40.6 Thermal Methods, 1373 40.7 Eddy Current Methods, 1375 References, 1410 41 Testing of Metallic Materials 1413 Peter C. McKeighan 41.1 Mechanical Test Laboratory, 1414 41.2 Tensile and Compressive Property Testing, 1418 41.3 Creep and Stress Relaxation Testing, 1420 41.4 Hardness and Impact Testing, 1422 41.5 Fracture Toughness Testing, 1425 41.6 Fatigue Testing, 1429 41.7 Other Mechanical Testing, 1433 41.8 Environmental Considerations, 1434 Acknowledgments, 1436 References, 1436 42 Ceramics Testing 1437 Shawn K. McGuire and Michael G. Jenkins 42.1 Introduction, 1437 42.2 Mechanical Testing, 1438 42.3 Thermal Testing, 1451 42.4 Nondestructive Evaluation Testing, 1458 42.5 Electrical Testing, 1460 42.6 Summary, 1461 References, 1461 43 Plastics Testing 1463 Vishu Shah 43.1 Introduction, 1464 43.2 Mechanical Properties, 1464 43.3 Thermal Properties, 1481 43.4 Electrical Properties, 1484 43.5 Weathering Properties, 1488 43.6 Optical Properties, 1492 Further Readings, 1496 44 Testing and Instrumental Analysis for Plastics Processing: Key Characterization Techniques 1499 Maria del Pilar Noriega 44.1 FTIR Spectroscopy, 1499 44.2 Chromatography (GC, GC-MSD, GC-FID, and HPLC), 1500 44.3 DSC and Thermogravimetry (TGA), 1510 44.4 Rheometry, 1518 References, 1527 45 Analytical Tools for Estimation of Particulate Composite Material Properties 1529 Tarek I. Zohdi and Magd E. Zohdi 45.1 Introduction, 1529 45.2 Concepts in Statistical Quality Control, 1530 45.3 Effective Property Estimates, 1531 45.4 Summary, 1535 References, 1537 PART V INSTRUMENTATION 1539 46 Instrument Statics 1541 Jerry Lee Hall, Sriram Sundararajan, and Mahmood Naim 46.1 Terminology, 1541 46.2 Static Calibration, 1544 46.3 Statistics in the Measurement Process, 1547 References, 1570 47 Input and Output Characteristics 1573 Adam C. Bell 47.1 Introduction, 1574 47.2 Familiar Examples of Input–Output Interactions, 1575 47.3 Energy, Power, Impedance, 1578 47.4 Operating Point of Static Systems, 1586 47.5 Transforming the Operating Point, 1598 47.6 Measurement Systems, 1602 47.7 Distributed Systems in Brief, 1607 47.8 Concluding Remarks, 1609 References, 1610 48 Bridge Transducers 1611 Patrick L. Walter 48.1 Terminology, 1612 48.2 Flexural Devices in Measurement Systems, 1612 48.3 The Resistance Strain Gage, 1615 48.4 The Wheatstone Bridge, 1625 48.5 Resistance Bridge Balance Methods, 1634 48.6 Resistance Bridge Transducer Measurement System Calibration, 1636 48.7 Resistance Bridge Transducer Measurement System Considerations, 1646 48.8 AC Impedance Bridge Transducers, 1655 References, 1660 Further Readings, 1661 49 Signal Processing 1663 John Turnbull 49.1 Frequency-Domain Analysis of Linear Systems, 1663 49.2 Basic Analog Filters, 1666 49.3 Basic Digital Filter, 1672 49.4 Stability and Phase Analysis, 1680 49.5 Extracting Signal from Noise, 1682 References, 1683 50 Data Acquisition and Display Systems 1685 Philip C. Milliman 50.1 Introduction, 1686 50.2 Data Acquisition, 1687 50.3 Process Data Acquisition, 1688 50.4 Data Conditioning, 1691 50.5 Data Storage, 1699 50.6 Data Display and Reporting, 1704 50.7 Data Analysis, 1707 50.8 Data Communications, 1708 50.9 Other Data Acquisition and Display Topics, 1712 50.10 Summary, 1715 References, 1715 PART VI MEASUREMENT STANDARDS 1517 51 Mathematical and Physical Units, Standards, and Tables 1719 Jack H. Westbrook 51.1 Symbols and Abbreviations, 1720 Bibliography for Letter Symbols, 1731 Bibliography for Graphic Symbols, 1737 51.2 Mathematical Tables, 1742 51.3 Statistical Tables, 1765 51.4 Units and Standards, 1775 Bibliography for Units and Measurements, 1802 51.5 Tables of Conversion Factors, 1802 51.6 Standard Sizes, 1833 51.7 Standard Screws, 1886 52 Measurement Uncertainty 1911 David Clippinger 52.1 Introduction, 1911 52.2 Literature, 1914 52.3 Evaluation of Uncertainty, 1915 52.4 Discussion, 1924 Disclaimer, 1924 References, 1925 53 Measurements 1927 E. L. Hixson and E. A. Ripperger 53.1 Standards and Accuracy, 1927 53.2 Impedance Concepts, 1930 53.3 Error Analysis, 1935 References, 1942 INDEX I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisComputer modeling and simulation (M&S) allows engineers to study and analyze complex systems. Discrete-event system (DES)-M&S is used in modern management, industrial engineering, computer science, and the military. As computer speeds and memory capacity increase, so DES-M&S tools become more powerful and more widely used in solving real-life problems. Based on over 20 years of evolution within a classroom environment, as well as on decades-long experience in developing simulation-based solutions for high-tech industries, Modeling and Simulation of Discrete-Event Systems is the only book on DES-M&S in which all the major DES modeling formalisms activity-based, process-oriented, state-based, and event-based are covered in a unified manner: A well-defined procedure for building a formal model in the form of event graph, ACD, or state graph Diverse types of modeling templates and examples that can be used as building blocks for a complex, real-lifeTable of ContentsPREFACE xvii ABBREVIATIONS xix PART I BASICS OF SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 1 1. Overview of Computer Simulation 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 What Is a System? 4 1.3 What Is Computer Simulation? 6 1.4 What Is Discrete-Event Simulation? 9 1.5 What Is Continuous Simulation? 11 1.6 What Is Monte Carlo Simulation? 12 1.7 What Are Simulation Experimentation and Optimization? 15 1.8 Review Questions 16 2. Basics of Discrete-Event System Modeling and Simulation 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 How Is a Discrete-Event Simulation Carried Out? 17 2.3 Framework of Discrete-Event System Modeling 23 2.4 Illustrative Examples of DES Modeling and Simulation 32 2.5 Application Frameworks for Discrete-Event System Modeling and Simulation 38 2.6 What to Cover in a Simulation Class 40 2.7 Review Questions 42 PART II FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCRETE-EVENT SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 43 3. Input Modeling for Simulation 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Empirical Input Modeling 46 3.3 Overview of Theoretical Distribution Fitting 48 3.4 Theoretical Modeling of Arrival Processes 50 3.5 Theoretical Modeling of Service Times 53 3.6 Input Modeling for Special Applications 57 3.7 Review Questions 59 4. Introduction to Event-Based Modeling and Simulation 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Modeling and Simulation of a Single Server System 70 4.3 Execution Rules and Specifications of Event Graph Models 72 4.4 Event Graph Modeling Templates 75 4.5 Event Graph Modeling Examples 82 4.6 Execution of Event Graph Models with SIGMA 91 4.7 Developing Your Own Event Graph Simulator 99 4.8 Review Questions 106 5. Parameterized Event Graph Modeling and Simulation 107 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Parameterized Event Graph Examples 108 5.3 Execution Rules and Specifications of the Parameterized Event Graph 110 5.4 Parameterized Event Graph Modeling of Tandem Lines 112 5.5 Parameterized Event Graph Modeling of Job Shops 115 5.6 Execution of Parameterized Event Graph Models Using SIGMA 122 5.7 Developing Your Own Parameterized Event Graph Simulator 137 5.8 Review Questions 142 6. Introduction to Activity-Based Modeling and Simulation 143 6.1 Introduction 143 6.2 Definitions and Specifications of an Activity Cycle Diagram 145 6.3 Activity Cycle Diagram Modeling Templates 150 6.4 Activity-Based Modeling Examples 156 6.5 Parameterized Activity Cycle Diagram and Its Application 163 6.6 Execution of Activity Cycle Diagram Models with a Formal Simulator ACE® 171 6.7 Review Questions 183 7. Simulation of ACD Models Using Arena 184 7.1 Introduction 184 7.2 Arena Basics 185 7.3 Activity Cycle Diagram-to-Arena Conversion Templates 197 7.4 Activity Cycle Diagram-Based Arena Modeling Examples 209 7.5 Review Questions 223 8. Output Analysis and Optimization 224 8.1 Introduction 224 8.2 Framework of Simulation Output Analyses 225 8.3 Qualitative Output Analyses 228 8.4 Statistical Output Analyses 230 8.5 Linear Regression Modeling for Output Analyses 234 8.6 Response Surface Methodology for Simulation Optimization 241 8.7 Review Questions 247 PART III ADVANCES IN DISCRETE-EVENT SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 253 9. State-Based Modeling and Simulation 255 9.1 Introduction 255 9.2 Finite State Machine 256 9.3 Timed Automata 261 9.4 State Graphs 267 9.5 System Modeling with State Graph 271 9.6 Simulation of Composite State Graph Models 283 10. Advanced Topics in Activity-Based Modeling and Simulation 299 10.1 Introduction 299 10.2 Developing Your Own Activity Cycle Diagram Simulators 300 10.3 Modeling with Canceling Arc 310 10.4 Cycle Time Analysis of Work Cells via an Activity Cycle Diagram 313 10.5 Activity Cycle Diagram Modeling of a Flexible Manufacturing System 322 10.6 Formal Model Conversion 329 11. Advanced Event Graph Modeling for Integrated Fab Simulation 338 11.1 Introduction 338 11.2 Flat Panel Display Fabrication System 339 11.3 Production Simulation of a Flat Panel Display Fab 343 11.4 Integrated Simulation of a Flat Panel Display Fab 350 11.5 Automated Material Handling Systems-Embedded Integrated Simulation of Flat Panel Display Fab 362 12. Concepts and Applications of Parallel Simulation 371 12.1 Introduction 371 12.2 Parallel Simulation of Workflow Management System 372 12.3 Overview of High-Level Architecture/Run-Time Infrastructure 378 12.4 Implementation of a Parallel Simulation with High-Level Architecture/Run-Time Infrastructure 383 REFERENCES 395 INDEX 400

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith the announcement in 2011 that the current Internet Protocol (IP), IPv4, has nearly run out, interest in IPv6 -- the latest IP version -- has grown substantially.Table of ContentsACKNOWLEDGMENTS XI INTRODUCTION XIII 1 IPv6 DEPLOYMENT DRIVERS 1 1.1 The Internet: A Success Story 1 1.1.1 Supply-Side Issues 3 1.1.2 Internet at a Crossroads 6 1.1.3 Which Internet Are You On? 7 1.2 Emerging Applications 7 1.3 IPv6 Business Case 10 2 IPv6 OVERVIEW 13 2.1 IPv6 Key Features 14 2.2 The IPv6 Header 14 2.2.1 IPv6 Extension Headers 15 2.3 IPv6 Addressing 17 2.3.1 Address Notation 18 2.3.2 Address Structure 19 2.3.3 IPv6 Address Allocations 20 2.3.4 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6) 27 2.3.5 IPv6 Ping 28 2.3.6 Multicast Listener Discovery 28 2.3.7 Multicast Router Discovery 31 2.3.8 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 31 2.3.9 Secure Neighbor Discovery (SEND) 33 2.3.10 Inverse Neighbor Discovery 33 2.3.11 Router Renumbering 34 2.3.12 Node Information Query 34 2.4 IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration 35 2.4.1 Modified EUI-64 Interface Identifiers 36 2.4.2 Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) 37 2.5 Mobile IPv6 38 2.6 Reserved Subnet Anycast Addresses 40 2.7 Required Host IPv6 Addresses 41 2.8 IPv6 Routing 41 3 IPv4/IPv6 CO-EXISTENCE TECHNOLOGIES 43 3.1 Dual Stack 44 3.1.1 Implementing Dual Stack 44 3.1.2 Which Address Is Used? 45 3.1.3 DNS Considerations 47 3.1.4 DHCP Considerations 48 3.2 Tunneling Approaches 49 3.2.1 Tunneling Scenarios for IPv6 Packets Over IPv4 Networks 49 3.2.2 Tunnel Types 51 3.2.3 Tunneling Scenario for IPv4 Packets Over IPv6 Networks 62 3.2.4 Tunneling Summary 63 3.3 Translation Approaches 63 3.3.1 IP/ICMP Translation 65 3.3.2 Bump in the Host (BIH) 72 3.3.3 Network Address Translation for IPv6/IPv4 (NAT64) 74 3.3.4 Other Translation Techniques 75 3.4 Application Support of IPv6 78 3.5 Service Provider IPv4/IPv6 Co-Existence 78 3.5.1 Reference Architecture 79 3.5.2 Deployment Approaches Overview 80 3.5.3 Routing Infrastructure Deployment Approaches 80 3.5.4 Comparison of Deployment Approaches 87 3.6 Addressing and DNS Considerations 87 4 IPv6 READINESS ASSESSMENT 91 4.1 Putting a Plan in Place 92 4.2 IP Network Inventory 93 4.2.1 IPv6 Readiness 93 4.2.2 Discovery 93 4.2.3 IPv6 Assessment 94 4.3 IPv6 to do List 106 4.4 IPv6 Readiness Assessment Summary 106 5 IPv6 ADDRESS PLANNING 109 5.1 Internet Registries 109 5.1.1 RIR Address Allocation Policies 111 5.1.2 Address Allocation Efficiency 112 5.2 IPv6 Address Planning 112 5.3 IPv6 Address Allocation Methods 113 5.3.1 Best-Fit Method 114 5.3.2 Sparse Allocation Method 116 5.3.3 Random Allocation 117 5.3.4 DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation 118 5.3.5 Unique Local Address Space 118 5.4 Defining Your IPv6 Address Plan 118 5.5 Multihoming and IP Address Space 122 5.6 IP Address Planning Summary 125 6 IPv6 SECURITY PLANNING 127 6.1 The Good News: IP Is IP 127 6.2 The Bad News: IPv6 Is Not IPv4 128 6.3 Update Your Security Policy 129 6.4 Network Perimeter Monitoring and Intrusion Prevention 129 6.4.1 IPv6 Address Filtering 130 6.4.2 ICMPv6 Messages 131 6.5 Extension Headers 132 6.6 Internal Network Protection 133 6.6.1 Network Reconnaissance 133 6.6.2 Network Access 134 6.6.3 DHCPv6 135 6.6.4 DNS 135 6.6.5 Anycast Addressing 136 6.6.6 Internal Network Filtering 136 6.7 Network Device Security Considerations 137 6.8 Mobile IPv6 Security 138 6.8.1 Mobility Extension Header 139 6.8.2 Mobile IPv6 Vulnerabilities 143 6.9 IPv4/IPv6 Coexistence Measures 144 6.9.1 Securing Tunneling Implementations 145 6.9.2 Securing Translation Implementations 146 6.10 Summary 148 7 IPv6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT PLANNING 149 7.1 Management Model 149 7.2 Network Management Scope 150 7.2.1 Network Inventory 150 7.2.2 IP Address Inventory 151 7.2.3 The Management Network 151 7.3 The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 152 7.3.1 Configuration Management 153 7.3.2 Fault Management 153 7.3.3 Accounting Management 154 7.3.4 Performance Management 154 7.4 Methods and Procedures 154 7.5 Summary 155 8 MANAGING THE DEPLOYMENT 157 8.1 Integrating Plans 157 8.2 Project Management 159 8.3 Testing Deployment 160 8.4 Production Deployment 161 9 MANAGING THE IPv4/IPv6 NETWORK 163 9.1 Common Network Management Tasks 163 9.2 Configuration Management 163 9.2.1 Network Allocation-Related Tasks 164 9.2.2 Adding a New Device 166 9.2.3 Deletion Tasks 167 9.2.4 Address Renumbering or Movement Tasks 168 9.2.5 Block/Subnet Splits 171 9.2.6 Block/Subnet Joins 172 9.2.7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration 173 9.2.8 DNS Server Configuration 174 9.2.9 Prefix Renumbering 175 9.3 Fault Management 176 9.3.1 Fault Detection 176 9.3.2 Troubleshooting and Fault Resolution 177 9.4 Accounting Management 177 9.4.1 Inventory Assurance 177 9.4.2 Address Reclamation 180 9.5 Performance Management 181 9.5.1 Services Monitoring 181 9.5.2 Application Performance Management 182 9.5.3 Auditing and Reporting 182 9.6 Security Management 183 9.7 Disaster Recovery/Business Continuity 183 10 IPv6 AND THE FUTURE INTERNET 185 10.1 Technology Enablers 185 10.2 The Internet’s Dark Side 187 10.3 The Internet’s Bright Future 187 10.3.1 Living Smarter 187 10.3.2 Keeping Track 188 10.3.3 Extensible Healthcare 188 10.3.4 Public Safety 188 10.3.5 Credit Cards of the Future 188 10.3.6 Consumer Applications 188 10.4 Conclusion 189 APPENDIX 191 BIBLIOGRAPHY 193 INDEX 199

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn ideal power system operation is the pinnacle of safety, reliability, and efficiency. In Practical Power System Operation, Ebrahim Vaahedi addresses system operators viewpoints in handling power system operation issues, a holistic approach that electrical textbooks rarely take.Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii General Introduction xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview of Power System Operation 1 1.2 Operator 2 1.3 Process 3 1.4 Technology 4 1.5 Power System Operation Criteria 4 1.6 Outline of the Book 5 2 POWER SYSTEM MONITORING 6 2.1 Operator Function in Power System Monitoring 6 2.2 Process for Power System Monitoring 6 2.3 Technology for Power System Monitoring 8 2.3.1 The Role of System Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 8 2.3.2 State Estimation 10 2.3.3 Least Square Method for State Estimation 11 2.4 Bad Data Identification 16 2.5 Observability 19 Questions and Problems 19 3 POWER SYSTEM SCENARIO ANALYSIS 21 3.1 Operator Function in Power System Scenario Analysis 21 3.2 Process for Power System Scenario Analysis 21 3.3 Technology for Power System Control 22 3.3.1 Infrastructure for Power System Control 22 3.3.2 Technology for Power System Scenario Analysis: Power Flow 26 3.3.3 System Modeling 27 3.3.4 Power Flow Techniques 29 3.3.5 Factorization 42 3.3.6 Sparsity 45 3.3.7 Different Power Flow Scenarios and Applications 46 Questions and Problems 47 4 POWER SYSTEM POSTURING: STATIC SECURITY 48 4.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Posturing: Static Security 48 4.2 Process for Power System Posturing: Static Security 48 4.3 Technology for Power System Posturing: Static Security 49 4.3.1 Contingency Analysis 49 4.3.2 Contingency Definition 50 4.3.3 Contingency Selection 51 4.3.4 Contingency Evaluation 56 4.3.5 Implementation of Remedial Action Schemes 60 Questions and Problems 60 5 POWER SYSTEM POSTURING: ANGULAR STABILITY 62 5.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Posturing: Angular Stability 62 5.2 Process for Power System Posturing: Angular Stability 62 5.3 Technology for Power System Posturing: Angular Stability 65 5.3.1 Angular Stability Assessment 65 5.3.2 Power System Stability 68 5.3.3 Angular Stability 68 5.3.4 Transient Stability 68 5.3.5 Small System 69 5.3.6 Integration Methods 71 5.3.7 Equal-Area Criteria Method 74 5.3.8 Models for Other Components 81 5.3.9 Multimachine System 81 5.3.10 Small-Signal Stability 82 5.3.11 Angular Stability Limit Derivation 83 5.4 Implementation of Angular Stability Limits 85 Questions and Problems 86 6 POWER SYSTEM POSTURING: VOLTAGE STABILITY 88 6.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Posturing: Voltage Stability 88 6.2 Process for Power System Posturing: Voltage Stability 88 6.3 Technology for Power System Posturing: Voltage Stability 91 6.3.1 Voltage Stability Assessment 91 6.4 Voltage Stability Limit Derivation and Implementation 99 6.4.1 Voltage Stability Limit Derivation 99 6.4.2 Implementation of Voltage Stability Limits 100 Questions and Problems 103 7 POWER SYSTEM GENERATION LOAD BALANCE 105 7.1 Operator’s Question on Generation Load Balance 105 7.2 Process for Generation Load Balance 105 7.2.1 Introduction 105 7.2.2 NERC Standards for Automatic Generation Control 108 7.2.3 Process for Automatic Generation Control 109 7.3 Technology for Generation Load Balance 111 7.3.1 Automatic Generation Control Application 111 7.3.2 Automatic Generation Control Infrastructure 115 7.3.3 Example on AGC Operation 116 Questions and Problems 117 8 Power System Operation Optimization 119 8.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Operation Optimization 119 8.2 Process for Power System Generation Operation 120 8.2.1 Introduction 120 8.2.2 Utility Model 120 8.3 Process for Generation Sufficiency 123 8.3.1 Generation Sufficiency Process for Operations Planning 123 8.3.2 Generation Sufficiency Process for Near Real Time 123 8.3.3 Generation Sufficiency Process for Real Time 124 8.4 Technology for Generation Sufficiency 124 8.4.1 Generation Sufficiency Applications 125 8.4.2 Generation Sufficiency Infrastructure 148 Questions and Problems 149 9 SYSTEM OPERATION CONTROL CENTERS 151 9.1 Introduction 151 9.2 Modern Control Center Attributes 151 9.3 Control Center Redundancy Configuration 154 9.4 Modern Control Center Configuration 155 9.5 Modern Control Center Design Details 156 Questions and Problems 159 10 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 161 10.1 Introduction 161 10.2 Ems Functionality Overview 162 10.2.1 System Monitoring 163 10.2.2 Decision Support Systems 164 10.2.3 EMS Control Actions 164 10.3 Energy Management System Availability Criteria and Architecture 165 10.3.1 Hardware Overview 166 10.3.2 Software Overview 168 10.3.3 Application Sequencing in EMS 171 10.3.4 Software Integration 172 Questions and Problems 174 11 DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 176 11.1 Introduction 176 11.2 DMS Functionality Overview 177 11.2.1 System Monitoring 179 11.2.2 Decision Support Systems 181 11.2.3 DMS Control Actions 186 11.3 Distribution Management System Architecture 186 11.3.1 Hardware Overview 186 11.3.2 Software Overview 187 11.3.3 Application Integration with DMS 189 Questions and Problems 192 12 EVOLVING POWER SYSTEM OPERATION SOLUTIONS 193 12.1 Introduction 193 12.2 Evolving Operation Solutions 193 12.2.1 Online Transient Stability 193 12.2.2 Online Voltage Stability 196 12.2.3 Total Transfer Capability Calculator 197 12.2.4 Transmission Outage Scheduling System 201 12.2.5 Synchrophasor Systems 202 12.2.6 Distribution Automation 204 12.2.7 Dynamic Thermal Rating Systems 205 12.2.8 Distributed Energy Resources 205 12.2.9 Demand Response 206 12.2.10 Microgrid 207 12.2.11 Real-Time Posturing and Control 208 12.2.12 Critical System Application and Facilities Heartbeat 208 12.2.13 Probabilistic Limit Calculations 208 12.2.14 Managing Critical Operations Knowledge: Operations Code Book 210 Appendix A Preliminary Concepts 211 A.1 Introduction 211 A.2 Phasor Representation 211 A.3 Per-Unit Representation 213 A.4 Matrix Algebra 215 A.5 Steady-State Component Modeling 216 A.5.1 Transmission Lines 216 A.5.2 Transformers and Phase Shifters 217 A.5.3 Generators 218 A.5.4 Shunts and Synchronous Condensers 218 A.5.5 Loads 218 A.5.6 Network Equations 218 References 219 Index 224

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers practical guidance on how to implement and deploy Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) in the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) mobile broadband environment. It explains how IPv6 is defined in the industry standards for cellular mobile broadband, why this route was taken, and what is the current reality of the deployment.Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii Glossary xxxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction to Internet and the Internet Protocol 2 1.2 Internet Principles 2 1.3 The Internet Protocol 4 1.3.1 Networks of Networks 6 1.3.2 Routing and Forwarding 7 1.4 Internet Protocol Addresses 9 1.4.1 IPv4 Addresses 9 1.4.2 IPv6 Addresses 11 1.5 Transport Protocols 12 1.5.1 User Datagram Protocol 13 1.5.2 Transmission Control Protocol 13 1.5.3 Port Numbers and Services 14 1.6 Domain Name Service 14 1.6.1 DNS Structure 14 1.6.2 DNS Operation 15 1.6.3 Top Level Domain 16 1.6.4 Internationalized Domain Names 17 1.7 IPv4 Address Exhaustion 17 1.7.1 IP Address Allocation 18 1.7.2 History of IPv4 Address Exhaustion 19 1.8 IPv6 History Thus Far 21 1.8.1 IPv6 Technology Maturity 21 1.8.2 IPv6 Network Deployments 22 1.9 Ongoing Cellular Deployments 23 1.10 Chapter Summary 24 1.11 Suggested Reading 24 References 24 2 Basics of the 3GPP Technologies 27 2.1 Standardization and Specifications 27 2.1.1 3GPP Standardization Process 28 2.1.2 IETF Standardization Process 31 2.1.3 Other Important Organizations in the 3GPP-Ecosystem 33 2.2 Introduction to 3GPP Network Architecture and Protocols 34 2.2.1 GSM System 34 2.2.2 General Packet Radio Service 36 2.2.3 Evolved Packet System 41 2.2.4 Control and User Planes, and Transport and User Layer Separation 44 2.3 3GPP Protocols 45 2.3.1 Control-Plane Protocols 46 2.3.2 User-Plane Protocols 53 2.3.3 GPRS Tunneling Protocol Versions 55 2.3.4 PMIP Based EPS Architecture 56 2.4 Mobility and Roaming 58 2.4.1 Mobility Management 59 2.4.2 Roaming 60 2.4.3 Mobility Management Beyond 3GPP 60 2.5 Central Concepts for IP Connectivity 61 2.5.1 PDP Contexts and EPS Bearers 61 2.5.2 Access Point Name 63 2.5.3 Traffic Flow Template 64 2.5.4 3GPP Link Model Principles 65 2.5.5 Multiple Packet Data Network Connections 67 2.6 User Equipment 68 2.6.1 Traditional 3GPP UE Model 69 2.6.2 Split-UE 69 2.7 Subscription Management Databases and Other Backend Systems 70 2.7.1 Home Location Register and Authentication Center 70 2.7.2 Home Subscriber Server 71 2.7.3 Equipment Identity Register 71 2.7.4 Other Backend Systems 71 2.8 End-to-end View from the User Equipment to the Internet 72 2.8.1 GPRS 72 2.8.2 EPS 73 2.9 Chapter Summary 75 2.10 Suggested Reading 75 References 76 3 Introduction to IPv6 79 3.1 IPv6 Addressing Architecture 80 3.1.1 IPv6 Address Format 80 3.1.2 IPv6 Address Types 81 3.1.3 IPv6 Address Scopes 81 3.1.4 IPv6 Addressing Zones 82 3.1.5 IPv6 Addresses on Network Interfaces 82 3.1.6 Interface Identifier and the Modified EUI-64 83 3.1.7 IPv6 Address Space Allocations 84 3.1.8 Special IPv6 Address Formats 84 3.1.9 Textual Presentations of IPv6 Addresses 86 3.2 IPv6 Packet Header Structure and Extensibility 87 3.2.1 Traffic Class and Flow Label 88 3.2.2 IPv6 Extension Headers 90 3.2.3 MTU and Fragmentation 92 3.2.4 Multicast 94 3.3 Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 97 3.3.1 Error Messages 98 3.3.2 Informational Messages 100 3.4 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 101 3.4.1 Router Discovery 101 3.4.2 Parameter Discovery 102 3.4.3 On-link Determination 104 3.4.4 Link-layer Address Resolution 104 3.4.5 Neighbor Unreachability Detection 105 3.4.6 Next-hop Determination 106 3.4.7 Duplicate Address Detection 106 3.4.8 Redirect 107 3.4.9 Secure Neighbor Discovery 107 3.4.10 Neighbor Discovery Proxies 108 3.5 Address Configuration and Selection Approaches 109 3.5.1 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 110 3.5.2 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Version 6 112 3.5.3 IKEv2 117 3.5.4 Address Selection 118 3.5.5 Privacy and Cryptographically Generated Addresses 120 3.5.6 Router Selection 121 3.6 IPv6 Link Types and Models 122 3.6.1 IPv6 over Point-to-point Links 123 3.6.2 IPv6 over Shared Media 124 3.6.3 Link Numbering 125 3.6.4 Bridging of Link Types 126 3.7 Mobile IP 126 3.7.1 Detecting Network Attachment 126 3.7.2 Host-based Mobile IP 127 3.7.3 Network-based Mobile IP 128 3.8 IP Security 130 3.8.1 Security Protocols 131 3.8.2 Security Associations 131 3.8.3 Key Management 132 3.8.4 Cryptographic Algorithms 132 3.8.5 MOBIKE 132 3.9 Application Programming Interfaces 133 3.9.1 Socket APIs 133 3.9.2 Address Family Agnostic APIs 133 3.9.3 IP Address Literals and Unique Resource Identifiers 134 3.9.4 Happy Eyeballs 134 3.10 Implications of IPv6 for Other Protocols 136 3.10.1 Transport Layer Protocols 136 3.10.2 Domain Name System 137 3.10.3 Applications 141 3.10.4 Internet Routing 141 3.10.5 Management Information Base 143 3.11 Validation and Certification 144 3.11.1 Test Suites 144 3.11.2 IPv6 Ready Logo 144 3.12 Example IPv6 Packet Flows 145 3.12.1 IPv6 on Ethernet 146 3.12.2 IPv6 with DNS and TCP 153 3.13 Chapter Summary 155 References 156 4 IPv6 in 3GPP Networks 163 4.1 PDN Connectivity Service 163 4.1.1 Bearer Concept 164 4.1.2 PDP and PDN Types 166 4.1.3 Link Models in 3GPP 168 4.2 End User IPv6 Service Impact on the 3GPP System 172 4.2.1 User, Control and Transport Planes 172 4.2.2 Affected Networking Elements 173 4.2.3 Charging and Billing 180 4.2.4 External PDN Access and the (S)Gi Interface 182 4.2.5 Roaming Challenges 187 4.3 End User IPv6 Service Impact on GTP and PMIPv6 Protocols 189 4.3.1 GTP Control Plane Version 1 189 4.3.2 GTP Control Plane Version 2 191 4.3.3 GTP User Plane 194 4.3.4 PMIPv6 194 4.4 IP Address Assignment, Configuration, and Management 195 4.4.1 Addressing Assumptions 195 4.4.2 Stateless IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration 197 4.4.3 Stateful IPv6 Address Configuration 200 4.4.4 Deferred Address Allocation 200 4.4.5 Static IPv6 Addressing 201 4.4.6 IPv6 Prefix Delegation 204 4.4.7 NAS Protocol Signaling and PCO Options 207 4.4.8 Initial E-UTRAN Attach Example with IPv4 and IPv6 Address Configuration 211 4.5 Bearer Establishment and Fallback Scenarios 214 4.5.1 Initial Connection Establishment 214 4.5.2 Backward Compatibility with Earlier Releases 215 4.5.3 Dual Address Bearer Flag 215 4.5.4 Requested PDN Type Handling in a PGW 216 4.5.5 Fallback Scenarios and Rules 217 4.5.6 Inter-RAT Handovers and Inter-SGSN Routing Area Updates 218 4.6 Signaling Interfaces 219 4.6.1 IPv6 as Transport 219 4.6.2 IPv6 in Information Element Level 219 4.7 User Equipment Specific Considerations 220 4.7.1 IPv6 and Impacted Layers 220 4.7.2 Required RFCs for Host UEs 222 4.7.3 DNS Issues 223 4.7.4 Provisioning 224 4.7.5 IPv6 Tethering 225 4.7.6 IPv6 Application Support 227 4.8 Multicast 227 4.9 Known IPv6 Issues and Anomalies 228 4.9.1 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Considerations 229 4.9.2 PDN Connection Model and Multiple IPv6 Prefixes 233 4.10 IPv6 Specific Security Considerations 233 4.10.1 IPv6 Addressing Threats 234 4.10.2 IPv6 First-hop Security 236 4.10.3 IPv6 Extension Header Exploits 237 4.11 Chapter Summary 239 References 240 5 IPv6 Transition Mechanisms for 3GPP Networks 248 5.1 Motivation for Transition Mechanisms 248 5.1.1 Phasing the Transition 250 5.2 Technology Overview 251 5.2.1 Translation 251 5.2.2 Encapsulation 253 5.2.3 Mesh or Hub-and-spoke 254 5.2.4 Scalability Concerns 255 5.3 Transition Toolbox 255 5.3.1 Transition Solutions Not Included 256 5.3.2 Dual-stack 257 5.3.3 NAT64 and DNS64 258 5.3.4 464XLAT 269 5.3.5 Bump-In-the-Host 271 5.3.6 Mapping Address and Port Number 272 5.3.7 Other Tunneling or Translation Based Transition Mechanisms 275 5.4 Transition Scenarios for 3GPP 277 5.4.1 Transition Scenario Evolution 278 5.4.2 Dual-stack 280 5.4.3 IPv6-only 281 5.4.4 Double Translation 281 5.5 Transition Impacts on 3GPP Architecture 282 5.5.1 Transition Impact on the Supporting Infrastructure 282 5.5.2 IP Network Support Systems 283 5.5.3 Tools to Divide Subscribers Per IP Capability 285 5.5.4 Translation Implications 286 5.5.5 Transition Support in the Transport Plane 287 5.5.6 Roaming 287 5.5.7 Impact of Delayed Transition to IPv6 288 5.6 Transitioning to IPv6 289 5.6.1 Application Developer’s Transition Plan 290 5.6.2 Phone Vendor’s Transition Plan 290 5.6.3 Network Operator’s Transition Checklist 290 5.7 Chapter Summary 292 References 293 6 Future of IPv6 in 3GPP Networks 296 6.1 IPv6-based Traffic Offloading Solutions 296 6.1.1 Motivations in Cellular Networks 297 6.1.2 Benefits of IPv6-based Offloading Approaches 299 6.1.3 IP-friendly Offloading Solutions 299 6.1.4 Concluding Remarks 303 6.2 Evolving 3GPP Bearers to Multiple Prefixes and Next-hop Routers 304 6.2.1 Background and Motivation 304 6.2.2 Multi-prefix Bearer Solution Proposal 305 6.2.3 Overall Impact Analysis 311 6.2.4 Open Issues and Future Work 313 6.3 LTE as the Uplink Access for Home Networks 313 6.3.1 Homenet at IETF 313 6.3.2 Homenet and 3GPP Architecture 314 6.3.3 Additional 3GPP Deployment Options 315 6.4 Port Control Protocol 316 6.4.1 Deployment Scenarios 317 6.4.2 Protocol Features 318 6.4.3 PCP Server Discovery 319 6.4.4 Protocol Messages 319 6.4.5 Cascaded NATs 320 6.4.6 Relation to IPv6 Transition 320 6.5 Internet of Things 321 6.5.1 Typical Use Cases 321 6.5.2 Standardization Organizations Working with IoT 322 6.5.3 IoT Domain from the 3GPP Point of View 327 6.5.4 Implications to UEs 328 6.5.5 Implications to 3GPP Networks 329 6.6 Chapter Summary 331 References 332 Index 337

Read more less

Book SynopsisBridges the gap between electromagnetics and circuits by addressing electrometric modeling (EM) using the Partial Element Equivalent Circuit (PEEC) method This book provides intuitive solutions to electromagnetic problems by using the Partial Element Equivalent Circuit (PEEC) method.Table of ContentsDEDICATION xv PREFACE xvii ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS xxi ACRONYMS xxv 1 Introduction 1 References, 6 2 Circuit Analysis for PEEC Methods 9 2.1 Circuit Analysis Techniques, 9 2.2 Overall Electromagnetic and Circuit Solver Structure, 9 2.3 Circuit Laws, 11 2.4 Frequency and Time Domain Analyses, 13 2.5 Frequency Domain Analysis Formulation, 14 2.6 Time Domain Analysis Formulations, 17 2.7 General Modified Nodal Analysis (MNA), 22 2.8 Including Frequency Dependent Models in Time Domain Solution, 28 2.9 Including Frequency Domain Models in Circuit Solution, 31 2.10 Recursive Convolution Solution, 39 2.11 Circuit Models with Delays or Retardation, 41 Problems, 43 References, 44 3 Maxwell’s Equations 47 3.1 Maxwell’s Equations for PEEC Solutions, 47 3.2 Auxiliary Potentials, 52 3.3 Wave Equations and Their Solutions, 54 3.4 Green’s Function, 58 3.5 Equivalence Principles, 60 3.6 Numerical Solution of Integral Equations, 63 Problems, 65 References, 66 4 Capacitance Computations 67 4.1 Multiconductor Capacitance Concepts, 68 4.2 Capacitance Models, 69 4.3 Solution Techniques for Capacitance Problems, 74 4.4 Meshing Related Accuracy Problems for PEEC Model, 79 4.5 Representation of Capacitive Currents for PEEC Models, 82 Problems, 85 References, 86 5 Inductance Computations 89 5.1 Loop Inductance Computations, 90 5.2 Inductance Computation Using a Solution or a Circuit Solver, 95 5.3 Flux Loops for Partial Inductance, 95 5.4 Inductances of Incomplete Structures, 96 5.5 Computation of Partial Inductances, 99 5.6 General Inductance Computations Using Partial Inductances and Open Loop Inductance, 107 5.7 Difference Cell Pair Inductance Models, 109 5.8 Partial Inductances with Frequency Domain Retardation, 119 Retardation, 123 Problems, 125 References, 131 6 Building PEEC Models 133 6.1 Resistive Circuit Elements for Manhattan-Type Geometries, 134 6.2 Inductance–Resistance (Lp,R)PEEC Models, 136 6.3 General (Lp,p,R)PEEC Model Development, 138 6.4 Complete PEEC Model with Input and Output Connections, 148 6.5 Time Domain Representation, 154 Problems, 154 References, 155 7 Nonorthogonal PEEC Models 157 7.1 Representation of Nonorthogonal Shapes, 158 7.2 Specification of Nonorthogonal Partial Elements, 163 7.3 Evaluation of Partial Elements for Nonorthogonal PEEC Circuits, 169 Problems, 181 References, 182 8 Geometrical Description and Meshing 185 8.1 General Aspects of PEEC Model Meshing Requirements, 186 8.2 Outline of Some Meshing Techniques Available Today, 187 8.3 SPICE Type Geometry Description, 194 8.4 Detailed Properties of Meshing Algorithms, 196 8.5 Automatic Generation of Geometrical Objects, 202 8.6 Meshing of Some Three Dimensional Pre-determined Shapes, 205 8.7 Approximations with Simplified Meshes, 207 8.8 Mesh Generation Codes, 208 Problems, 209 References, 210 9 Skin Effect Modeling 213 9.1 Transmission Line Based Models, 214 9.2 One Dimensional Current Flow Techniques, 215 9.3 3D Volume Filament (VFI) Skin-Effect Model, 227 9.4 Comparisons of Different Skin-Effect Models, 238 Problems, 244 References, 246 10 PEEC Models for Dielectrics 249 10.1 Electrical Models for Dielectric Materials, 249 10.2 Circuit Oriented Models for Dispersive Dielectrics, 254 10.3 Multi-Pole Debye Model, 257 10.4 Including Dielectric Models in PEEC Solutions, 260 10.5 Example for Impact of Dielectric Properties in the Time Domain, 276 Problems, 281 References, 281 11 PEEC Models for Magnetic Material 285 11.1 Inclusion of Problems with Magnetic Materials, 285 11.2 Model for Magnetic Bodies by Using a Magnetic Scalar Potential and Magnetic Charge Formulation, 292 11.3 PEEC Formulation Including Magnetic Bodies, 295 11.4 Surface Models for Magnetic and Dielectric Material Solutions in PEEC, 300 Problems, 307 References, 308 12 Incident and Radiated Field Models 309 12.1 External Incident Field Applied to PEEC Model, 310 12.2 Far-Field Radiation Models by Using Sensors, 312 12.3 Direct Far-Field Radiation Computation, 318 Problems, 322 References, 322 13 Stability and Passivity of PEEC Models 325 13.1 Fundamental Stability and Passivity Concepts, 327 13.2 Analysis of Properties of PEEC Circuits, 332 13.3 Observability and Controllability of PEEC Circuits, 334 13.4 Passivity Assessment of Solution, 337 13.5 Solver Based Stability and Passivity Enhancement Techniques, 342 13.6 Time Domain Solver Issues for Stability and Passivity, 359 Acknowledgment, 364 Problems, 364 References, 365 A Table of Units 369 A.1 Collection of Variables and Constants for Different Applications, 369 B Modified Nodal Analysis Stamps 373 B.1 Modified Nodal Analysis Matrix Stamps, 373 B.2 Controlled Source Stamps, 380 References, 382 C Computation of Partial Inductances 383 C.1 Partial Inductance Formulas for Orthogonal Geometries, 385 C.2 Partial inductance formulas for nonorthogonal geometries, 398 References, 407 D Computation of Partial Coefficients of Potential 409 D.1 Partial Potential Coefficients for Orthogonal Geometries, 410 D.2 Partial Potential Coefficient Formulas for Nonorthogonal Geometries, 418 References, 421 E Auxiliary Techniques for Partial Element Computations 423 E.1 Multi-function Partial Element Integration, 423 Subdivisions for Nonself-Partial Elements, 428 References, 429 INDEX 431

Read more less